Instruction Manual

INK JET PRINTER FOR INDUSTRIAL MARKING

HITACHI Printer
Model UX Twin-Nozzle

Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi IJ Printer Model UX Twin Nozzle.
This printer employs a noncontact, ink-jet method to print onto a print target.
This instruction manual describes the basic operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and other detailed
handling procedures of the Hitachi IJ Printer Model UX Twin Nozzle.
If the printer is improperly handled or maintained, it may not operate smoothly and may become defective or
cause an accident. It is therefore essential that you read this manual to gain a complete understanding of the
printer and use it correctly.
After thoroughly reading the manual, properly store it for future reference.

IF you changed the language of the screen by mistake, see Chapter 7.8 "Selecting Languages".
 Usage Precaution
● Before using the printer, thoroughly read the following safety precautions for optimum printer
use.

● All the instructions set forth in this manual are important and must therefore be observed
without fail.

● After the manual has been read, it must be stored in such a location that all printer operation
personnel can refer to it at all times.

● Please make sure the print status and print content are correct each time when you start
operation of IJP.

● Please implement periodical checkup of print status in the process, even including during
production.

Restrictions on Export
User hereby agrees not to export or re-export this product to any end-user who the user
has reason to suspect may utilize the product for the design, development or reproduction
of nuclear, chemical or biochemical weapons.
The product or system including the product cannot be used in countries or areas other
than those which have concluded a sales contract.

Trademark
File management and USB management are carried out using eParts made from
RENESAS EASTON Co., Ltd.
Ethernet is the product name of Xerox Corporation in America.

(1) ●Usege Precautions

 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
● You should observe the precautions set forth below in order to use the product properly and
avoid endangering you or other persons or damaging property. For the purpose of clarifying
the severity of injury or damage and likelihood of occurrence, the precautions are classified
into two categories, WARNING and CAUTION, which both describe hazardous situations
that may arise if you ignore the precautions and perform an incorrect handling or operating
procedure. The precautions in these two categories are both important and must therefore
be observed without fail.

WARNING is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which

WARNING may cause severe personal injury or death if the warning against
performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.

CAUTION is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which

CAUTION may cause personal injury or property damage if the warning
against performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.

Pictograph Examples
The symbols are used to indicate precautions (including those related to
potential warnings) to be observed. Detailed information is furnished by a picture
within the symbol outline (a shock hazard is indicated by the example shown at
left).
The symbols are used to describe prohibited actions. The details of a
prohibited action are given by a picture within or near the symbol outline (the
example shown at left dictates that you must keep flames away).

The symbols are used to describe required actions. Detailed instructions are
given by a picture within the symbol outline (the example shown at left dictates
that a ground connection must be made).

●Safety Precautions (2)

 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
Installation Environment of Printer

WARNING
● Ensure that there is no flame- or arc-generating device around the
printer.
The ink and makeup are both flammable and may cause fire.
Fire can be generated by matches, lighters, cigarettes, heaters, stoves, gas
burners, welders, grinders and static electricity. Arcs may be generated from
open-type relays, switches, and brush motors. Before handling the ink and
makeup, remove static electricity from your body, peripheral equipment, and so
on. In the interest of safety, position a dry-chemical fire extinguisher near the
printer.

● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, install the printer at
an adequately ventilated location.
1 Never install the printer in an enclosed space.
2 Connect exhaust equipment to the printer in order to prevent it from filling
with organic solvent vapor.
3 Secure adequate space for the ink/makeup handling area and printer
installation site. At least 400 m3 must be provided per print head.
Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided.

CAUTION
● If extraneous noise enters the printer, it may malfunction or break down.
For maximum noise immunity, observe the following installation and wiring
precautions.
1 Ensure that 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC power cables are not
bundled with other power supply cables.
2 Insulate the printer main body and print head so that they do not come into
direct contact with the conveyor or other devices.
3 If the employed print target detector is housed in a metal case, use a plastic
mounting brace for the purpose of insulating the detector from the conveyor
and other devices.
4 Be sure that the print target detector wiring is not bundled together with other
power supply cables.

(3) ●Safety Precautions

 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
Grounding

WARNING
● Ensure that all electrical wiring, connections and grounding comply with
applicable cords. Properly connect the printer to its dedicated ground.
Complete the above procedure to avoid electrical shock hazards.

● When welding, keep enough space between the IJ printer and the
welding work area to prevent the arc from starting a fire. Also, be sure to
insulate the printhead and IJ printer frame to keep the welding current
from flowing to the control section of the printer, and to make a separate
ground connection for the printer.

● If you wish to receive ink particles in a beaker, for a printing test for
example, use an electrically conductive beaker and connect the beaker
securely to the ground.
Do not let the tip of the printing head enter the beaker.
Ink particles used for printing are electrically charged. An ungrounded beaker
has a gradually rising charge, possibly catching on or causing a fire.

Cable Handling

WARNING
● Use an AC voltage of 100 to120 V or 200 to 240 V ±10% only and a
power frequency of 50 or 60 Hz only.
If the above requirements are not met, the electric parts may overheat and
burn, creating a risk of fire or electric shock.

●Safety Precautions (4)

 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
Ink and Makeup Handling

WARNING
● When charging a refill of ink or makeup, exchanging ink, or otherwise
handling ink or makeup, take enough care not to spill ink or makeup.
If you spill any ink or makeup by mistake, wipe it off neatly and promptly with
wiping paper or something similar. Do not close the maintenance cover until
you make sure that the portion you have just wiped is completely dry.
You must pay particular attention when you have spilled ink or makeup inside
the printer and it is not completely dry. Why? Because vapors of ink or
makeup will stay inside the printer and may catch on or cause a fire.
If you find it hard to wipe the printer when it is turned on, stop it with the maintenance
cover open. Power it down, and then wipe it off again.

● If you wish to clean the casing of the printer with wiping paper impregnated
with makeup, be sure to do so with the power off.
Attempting to clean it when the power is on will cause makeup or vapors of makeup
to enter the printer, possibly catching on or causing a fire.
When the cleaning is over, open the maintenance cover and make sure that no
makeup has entered and no vapors remain inside.

● Should you find a leak of ink or makeup inside the printer while the printer is
running or being maintained, wipe it off promptly with wiping paper or
something similar. Then, with the maintenance cover open, stop the printer,
power it down, and repair the leak.
Continuing operation with a leak of ink or makeup will cause an anomaly,
resulting in abnormal printing.
Ink and makeup are flammable. They may therefore catch on or cause a fire.

● The ink and makeup, their waste solution, used wiping papers and empty
containers are flammable. Waste disposal must comply with appropriate
regulations. Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.

CAUTION
● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, observe the following
handling precautions.
1 When handling the ink or makeup, wear protective gloves and safety goggles to
avoid direct skin contact. If the ink or makeup comes into contact with skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and warm or cold water.
2 When transferring the ink or makeup to or from a bottle, exercise caution to
prevent it coming into contact with the printer or surrounding articles.
If there is any spillage, immediately wipe it clean using a cloth moistened with
makeup.

● Ink and makeup must be stored as flammable liquids. Storage must comply
with local regulatory requirements. Consult the appropriate regulatory
agency for further information.
(5) ●Safety Precautions
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
Main Body Handling

WARNING
● Do not insert tweezers, a screwdriver, or any other metal article into the ink
ejection hole in the end of the print head.
When the printer is ready to print, a high voltage (approximately 6 kV) is applied to
the deflection electrode section in the print head.
Exercise caution to avoid electric shock, injury, and fire.

● Do not remove covers and/or screws which are not specified on this manual.
A high voltage is applied to some sections of the printer.
Exercise caution to avoid electric shock and injury.

● Exercise caution to avoid inadvertently disconnecting, forcibly pulling, or

bending piping tubes.
Since the ink and makeup in some portions of piping tubes are pressurized, they
may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands or clothing.
If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or cold
water and consult a physician.

● While the printer is operating, do not look into the ink ejection hole in the end
of the print head.
Ink or makeup may enter your eyes or mouth or soil your hands or clothing.
If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or cold
water and consult a physician.

● When ejecting the ink, do it after confirming that there is no one in the ejection
direction.
(Operate with the end of the print head inserted in a beaker, etc.)

● Before servicing the printer, be sure to stop the ink ejection.

Because ink or makeup may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands or
clothing. If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with
warm or cold water and consult a physician.

● If an earthquake, fire, or other emergency occurs while the printer is engaged

in printing or just turned on, press the Main power switch to turn off the power.

CAUTION
● Only persons who have completed an operator training course for
Hitachi IJP can operate and service the printer.
If the printer is operated or serviced incorrectly, it may malfunction or break down.

● Do not attempt to make repairs for any purpose other than operation or
maintenance.

●Safety Precautions (6)

 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
Related Regulations

WARNING
● Never drain the ink or makeup waste solution into a public sewer system.
Waste disposal must comply with all appropriate regulations.
Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.

● The printer must be managed in compliance with all appropriate regulations.

Read and understand the appropriate Safety Data Sheet (SDS) before using any ink
or makeup.

FCC Notice
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

(7) ●Safety Precautions

 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
<Keep all fire away.>
○ Ink and Makeup are flammable.
○ All fire must be kept away from the machine.
○ Spilled Ink and Makeup must be wiped off and dried up immediately.

<Caution when handling Ink/Makeup>

○ Strage must comply with local regulatory requirements .
○ Read and understand Safety Data Sheet(SDS).
○ Be sure to wear protective gloves and safety goggies.
○ If the Ink/Makeup in used is an organic solvent,it must be managed in compliance with the
Ordinance on the prevention or Organic Solvent poisoning.Refer to the "Instruction Manual"and
the "Handling guidance of each ink" for details.

AVERTISSEMENT
< Tenir hors de portée du feu. >
○ L’encre et la composition sont inflammables.
○ Tenir la machine hors de portée du feu.
○ Nettoyez et séchez immédiatement les projections d’encre et de composition.

<Soyez prudent lorsque vous manipulez l’encre/la composition>

○ Le stockage doit respecter les obligations réglementaires locales.
○ Lisez attentivement la fiche signalétique de sécurité de l’appareil (FSSP).
○ Assurez-vous de porter des gants et des lunettes de protection.
○ Si l’encre/la composition utilisée est un solvant biologique, vous devez le manipuler
conformément au décret sur la prévention des empoisonnements par solvant biologique.
Reportez-vous au «Mode d’emploi» et aux «Conseils de manipulation de chaque type d’encre»
pour plus de détails.

●Safety Precautions (8)

 SECURITY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
In the control system, the connection with the information and telecommunications system is
progressing recently, and it causes for the increased security risk such as cyber attacks.
In a system applying this product, both physical security measures mainly in the installation location
and security measures against the network usage are required.

[Security risk example via the network]

● Abnormal operation, performance degradation, information leakage and data tampering by
attacks from outside
● Malfunction, harm and damage occurrence due to programs and/or data tampering from
outside
● It is used as an attacking step for other systems

However, the security level to be determined varies by each control system. In addition, the
assumed security risk is not fixed, it will be something to change on a daily basis.

Not only in our products, individual security protection support functions of each product configuring
the system is one means to ensure the security level required for the system, it does not completely
prevent the security risk growing day by day.

The construction of the security level required for the control systems are responsible by the system
and customer. In addition, for the maintenance of the security level will require continuous
improvement of measures.

In a system using this product, trouble, accident or damages caused by unauthorized external
access, Hitachi Group will not be able to bear any responsibility.

It is required for the customer side to clarify the target of the security protection of the system.
Then set up the typical measures as below, and build out and operate the system.

● Utilization and periodic review of the authentication function for the program and the data to be
protected
● Utilize the security functions of the device configuring the network
● Prevention of the unspecified connection by use of the function to identify the target
connection
● Measures in the operational management, such as to lock the location of devices or restrict
the operator

Please use the USB memory only on this device. Please do regularly virus check for the USB
by using a computer with the latest antivirus software.

(9) ●Security Precautions

CONTENTS
1. USAGE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Ink and makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 IJ printer long-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Print head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 Shutdown (no-cleaning stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.5 Cautions on operating time when printer is in service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.6 Heating of ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.7 Ink concentration control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.8 Gutter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.9 Protection sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

2. COMPONENT NAMES AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 External views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Main body internal parts arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 Screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

3. BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Start operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Start operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 When an error occurred at the start of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.3 Ready and Standby state switching operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.4 Specifying the login user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.2 Shut down operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.2.1 Automatically stopping by pressing one button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.2.2 Stopping ink ejection by pressing the screen button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.2.3 Turning off the main power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.3 Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.3.1 Operating Scheme(New HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.3.2 Operating Scheme(Previous HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.3.3 Change procedure of (New HMI) ⇔ (Previous HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.3.4 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

●Contents 1
 3.3.5 Operation of screen transition (New HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.3.6 Basic operation to change the settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.3.7 Operations (OK, Back, Apply) which exit from a screen (Previous HMI) . . . . . . . . . 3-33

4. CREATION AND PRINTING OF MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . .4-1

4.1 Print description screen (initial screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Edit messages to be printed (Change message screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3 Call and print saved messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.4 Overwrite messages to be printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.5 Edit messages different from the current message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.6 Save created messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.7 Set the print format (Fixed layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.7.1 Select the print items to be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.7.2 Set the number of print lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.7.3 Add and delete print items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.7.5 Print a bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.8 Set the print format (Free layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.8.1 Select the print items to be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.8.2 Set the print items to be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.8.3 Add and delete print items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.8.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.8.5 Print a bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.8.6 Cautions for printing overlapped some print items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.9 Set the print format (Right-angled printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.9.1 Select the print items to be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.9.2 Set the number of print lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.9.3 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.10 Print characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.10.1 Print fixed characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.11 Use the calendar function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.11.1 Print calendar characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.11.2 Print future date (offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.11.3 Print by substituting a different character for the date (substitution rule) . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.11.4 Cautions for printing calendar character when using Right-angled printing . . . . . . 4-54
4.12 Print shift code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.13 Update the print contents at a fixed interval(Time count) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

2 ●Contents
 4.14 Use the count function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.14.1 Print count characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.14.2 Use count multiplication printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.14.3 Skip specified character and print (Count skip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4.14.4 Cautions for printing count character when using Right-angled printing . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.15 Set the print specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.15.1 Set the character height, character width, and orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.15.2 Set repeat printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.15.3 Set various printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
4.15.4 Fine adjust the print specifications (Adjust print parameters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4.16 Using the AI code input support function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

5. MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Confirm the Unit information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Monitor operational status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Print without any sensor signal (Test print, Start printing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.4 Confirm the registered software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.5 Checking the functions that can be performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

6. ENVIRONMENT SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Set the user environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Set the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.3 Set up the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4 Changing the login user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.5 Setting password for each user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

7. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Manage messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Managing stored messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2 Changing the message name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.3 Deleting stored messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.4 Changing message number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.5 Changing the group to which a message belongs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.1.6 Checking the print image of registered print data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.2 Manage group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
3
7.2.1 Manage group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.2.2 Change group name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.2.3 Delete a stored group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.2.4 Change group number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

●Contents 3
 7.3 Creating a user pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3.1 Creating and saving user pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.3.2 Selecting a user pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.3.3 Editing a pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.3.4 Creating a user pattern of a free size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.3.5 Selecting a bitmap file(BMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.4 Touch screen coordinate correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.5 Backing up data to USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.5.1 Copy data all at once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.5.2 Copy data individually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.6 Editing standard pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7.7 Editing Substitution Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7.8 Selecting Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

8. INK AND MAKEUP REPLENISHMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

8.1 Replenishing the ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Replenishing the makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

9. WHEN WARNING OR FAULT WAS GENERATED . . . . . .9-1

9.1 Display when warning or fault was generated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 On-screen message descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.1 Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.2 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.2.3 Other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.3 When checking the warning and fault generation status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.4 Remedial action to be taken in the event of a printing failure. . . . . . . . . . 9-14

10. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

11. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

12. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

13. APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

● Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

4 ●Contents
 1. USAGE PRECAUTIONS
1.1 Ink and makeup
(1) Ink and makeup replenishment
The printer employs an automatic ink/makeup replenishment system. While the printer is operated, the
ink reservoir automatically supplies the ink and the makeup reservoir automatically supplies the makeup
to the ink main tank at regular intervals. If the ink or makeup replenisher level is too low, an alarm is
issued. In this case, replenish the ink or makeup without delay.
(For the replenishment procedures, see Section 8.)

(2) Ink periodic replacement

For the replacement procedures, see “Technical Manual Chapter 6”.
●While the IJ printer ink circulates for operations, it reacts with the atmospheric air elements and
deteriorates with time. Therefore, it needs periodic replacement. The guide for determining the
replacement interval conforms to the handling guidance of each ink.
*What is makeup? :
The makeup serves as the replenisher that makes up for the constituent loss due to ink
evaporation during ink ejection. It is also used as a cleaning solution.
(3) When using the cartridge bottle makeup as the cleaning solution
1 Open the makeup cartridge bottle by turning its cap.
CAUTION
● Do not remove the over cap.

Cap Over cap

Makeup
cartridge bottole

2 Use the makeup by transferring it to the cleaning bottle.

Cleaning bottole

CAUTION
● If the cleaning solution is not available, pour the makeup of the makeup cartridge
bottle into the cleaning bottle before the makeup cartridge bottle is set.
● Tighten the cap of the makeup cartridge bottle after use.
Turn it upside down to check if there is No leakage of makeup.
● If the makeup in the makeup cartridge bottle is used as cleaning solution, the
content of makeup in the makeup cartridge bottle is reduced.
When it is set in the printer, please use the makeup cartridge bottle which contains
more than half of its content.
● In the makeup accidentally spilled, promptly wipe it up with the wiping paper.
●Ink and makeup 1-1
 1.2 IJ printer long-term shutdown
When the IJ printer is shut down for a long time due to production or other circumstances, the ink may
accrete inside of the printer and cause such problems as inability to be ejected or to be recovered. When
this occurs, the following actions must be taken.

1 Prevent accretion by operating the printer periodically.

Operate (eject ink) the printer for 1 hour or longer at least once during the “Shutdown Period
Guideline” shown in the table below.
2 Perform maintenance work for long-term shutdown if shut-down time exceeds reference period.
Before storage, drain the ink from inside the printer and fill the printer with makeup.
When restarting operation after storage, drain the makeup from inside the printer and fill the printer
with ink.
Refer to Technical manual “6.15 Long-term Shutdown” for detail.

Storage temperature Shutdown Period Guideline *1

0 to35 C 3 weeks
35 to 40 C 2 weeks
40 to 45 C 1 week
*1: Maximum period the printer can be continuously shut down without being operated.
● The values in the table are for MEK based ink.
● Handling of ink other than the above requires special handling in accordance with the han-
dling guidance of each ink.
● To prevent adhesion, store the equipment at the lowest temperature possible.
● Please note the ink may harden within a week when it is stored in 45 C or higher.

CAUTION
Since “Perform long-term shutdown storage work” requires special work,
it is recommended to contact your local distributor and ask for the work.

1-2 ●IJ printer long-term shutdown

1.3 Print head cleaning
Take the following precautions when cleaning ink from around the nozzle.

(1) Orient the end of the print head downward and pour makeup onto the dirty part and clean while
catching the makeup in a beaker.
Do not pour the makeup over this section.
Wipe the print head clean with wiping paper
dampened with the makeup.

Nozzle

Charge electrode

Deflection electrode

Cleaning range
Gutter

(2) After cleaning, thoroughly wipe the print head with wiping paper and allow it to dry.
●Thoroughly dry the nozzle, charge electrode, deflection electrode, mounting base and fringe of the gutter.
Confirm that the parts are sufficiently dry before starting the next operation.
If operated while wet, the printer will not start normally.
●While the print head is wet, do not orient its end upward.

(3) Never immerse the print head in the makeup.

(4)When printing is frequently performed or the distance between the print material and the print head is short,
ink splashes may stain the end of the print head and the print head cover. If this condition is left unresolved, the
stained status will be made worse, resulting in a print error or emergency stop. If a print error or emergency
stop frequently occurs because of stain due to ink splashes, stop the operation in progress and clean the end of
the print head (around the nozzle, charge electrode, deflection electrode, mounting base and gutter) and the
print head cover. Do this in addition to the cleaning to be performed at the end of each day’s work.

Air purging of the print head is effective against staining due to ink splashing.
See the Technical Manual “3.1 Print head air purge”.

●Print head cleaning 1-3

 1.4 Shutdown (no-cleaning stop)
When you press the SHUTDOWN → OK at HOME screen, the printer stops after completing its automatic
nozzle cleaning sequence. If you repeatedly activate the SHUTDOWN → OK to stop an operation,
excessive makeup will enter the printer, thereby thinning the ink or producing an unduly high ink main tank
solution level. If it is absolutely necessary to repeatedly stop the printer operation, use the following procedure.
(For detail the HOME screen, refer to “4.1 Print description screen (initial screen)”.)

The no-cleaning stop procedure works even while the startup sequence is being executed.
(The SHUTDOWN → OK is inoperative during the startup sequence.)

*1: Do not use the SHUTDOWN → OK to stop operation more than two successive times.
*2: When operation was stopped using SHUTDOWN → No-cleaning stop , if left in that state, the
ink will become stuck in the nozzle and cause ink stream bending, nozzle clogging, and printing
disturbance. Apply makeup to the nozzle orifice to wash it within 30 minutes after a stop to cause the
ink to eject once again.

1 Press SHUTDOWN at HOME screen, and the message "Shutdown Process

Confirmation" appears.

Press SHUTDOWN .

TEST

START PRINTING SHUTDOWN

SETTINGS LOGIN

CONFIRMATION ×

Shutdown Process Confirmation No.0051

Shutdown will stop the ink jet.

Solution 1. To stop the ink jet, press <OK>.
2. To stop the ink without cleaning, press <No-cleaning stop>.

No-cleaning
OK stop Close

22 Press No-cleaning stop on the message "Shutdown Process Confirmation".

1-4 ●Shutdown
1.5 Cautions on operating time when printer is in service

(1) Cautions when printer is repeatedly stopped immediately after the start
of operation
If you repeatedly stop the printer immediately after the start of operation, automatic nozzle cleaning at shutdown
will cause the ink in the IJ printer to gradually become thinner. For stable operation of the IJ printer, operate the
printer for a given amount of time or more once started.( =in Ink eject status)
During the operation, the ink viscosity is adjusted automatically and returns to the initial value.
The required amount of operation time varies depending on the ambient temperature or ink types used.
Refer to the handling guidance of each ink for details.

(2) Caution when daily operating time is relatively long

The IJ printer emits an ink jet when printing, so the outside and inside of the print head cover will become dirty
with accumulated ink spillage during operation. To prevent printing defects due to this ink accumulation,
periodically check the head cover and clean it as required.

1.6 Heating of ink

(1) If the ambient temperature is under approximately 20℃, the ink is heated by a heating unit in the print head.
The startup processing time relative to when not operating becomes long.

When not operating: Approximately 1.5 minutes

When operating: Maximum approximately 10 minutes (The rise processing time changes depending on the
ambient temperature.)

(2) When a heating unit fault occurs, take care of the following items.
If a heating unit fault occurs, the messages “Ink Heating Unit too High”, “Ink Heating Unit Temperature
1 Sensor Fault”, or “Ink Heating Unit Over Current” are displayed and the IJ printer fault stops.
The IJ printer can be restarted by pressing the Reset or Close . However, the ink will not be heated even
if the temperature drops thereafter.

Once “do not perform ink heating” is set, the following message is always displayed whenever the power
2 is turned on thereafter. Cancel the message by pressing the Close and be sure to inform your nearest
local distributor.

CONFIRMATION ×

Ink Temperature Correction Notice No.0187

The selected setup does not allow ink temperature corrections

to be made.

Solution Contact your local distributor.

Close

3 If the printer is temporally operated in "do not perform ink heating" status, the operation of the printer
may become possible by resetting the excitation voltage.
Reset the excitation voltage according to Technical Manual “6.10 Excitation V Adjustment”.

●Cautions on operating time when printer is in service 1-5

 1.7 Ink concentration control
(1) The ink is automatically controlled to maintain optimum concentration for printing.

(2)If an error occurs in the viscometer which is used to control ink concentration, take care of the following points:
1 There are three types of viscometer errors:
“Inside Temperature Sensor Fault”, “Viscometer Reading Instability”, and “Viscometer Reading Out of
Range”.
2 When a “Inside Temperature Sensor Fault” occurs, the unit will enter the fault stop state.
Re-start is possible by pressing the Close , but the setting will be changed to the state in which ink
concentration control based on the measured result using the viscometer is not performed thereafter.
Once the setting of automatic concentration control is released, every time the power is turned on, the
following message will appear. Cancel the message by pressing the Close and be sure to inform your
nearest local distributor.

CONFIRMATION ×

No Ink Concentration Control No.0200

The current settings have made ink concentration control

unavailable.

Solution Contact your local distributor.

Close

3 When “Viscosity Reading Instability” or “Viscosity Readings Out of Range” occurs, the unit will not
enter the fault stop state and printing can be continued. However, you should contact your nearest
local distributor for inspection.

1.8 Gutter cleaning

The IJ printer collects ink not used for printing from the gutter. At the same time, it sucks in atmospheric gas, dust,
and other matter from the air. If these substances are mixed with the ink in the gutter, undissolved
components in the ink or makeup may stick to the gutter. If the system is run for 24 consecutive hours without
automatic cleaning, these components will gradually accumulate in the gutter. This, together with the ink stream
coming into contact with it, may cause such errors as “an error stemming from a dirty head”.
1 Clean the gutter and its perimeters with makeup periodically.
2 Perform the procedures descibed in “6.6 Cleaning the Gutter” in Technical Manual, and claen the gutter and the
recovery route.
Should the solution above do not work, contact your nearest distributor.

1-6 ●Ink concentration control

1.9 Protection sheet
A protection sheet is provided to protect the screen display of the IJ printer.
This is used to prevent the screen display from becoming dirty, scratched, etc.

(1) Installing the protection sheet

1 Clean all dirt, debris, ink, etc., from the panel surface.
Use a paper wipe, etc., soaked in water or makeup to wipe the display clean.
*Install the protection sheet after the panel surface has dried.
2 Peel off the removable paper from the back of the protection sheet.
*Do not touch the double-sided tape on the back of the protection sheet.
3 Affix the protection sheet to the IJ printer screen display as shown in the figure.

When ordering the protection sheet,

please specify the following parts No.

Protection sheet parts No.:451902

(3pcs/pack)

(2) Usage Precautions

Be careful not to get ink or makeup on the protection sheet.
If ink or makeup does get on the protection sheet, wipe it off immediately.

●Protection sheet 1-7

 2. COMPONENT NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
2.1 External views
(1) External views
Power lamp
Operating status
indicator lamps Main power switch
Displays "Ready",
"Fault" and "Warning".
Power cable
RFID reader
Reads ID of ink and
makeup for certification.
Maintenance cover
Opened/closed for ink
and makeup replacement
USB cover and other maintenance
purposes.

Maintenance
cover knob On / Stop switch
Pull toward you to open.

Print head
This section
performs printing.

(2) External views (rear side)

Air-purge
connection port

Exhaust duct
connection port

Attention to the handling of IJ printer

Stainless steel of the main body has the character it not to be easy rust, but it is
a possibility that rust is generated when leaving it for a long time. To prevent rust
being generated, we will recommend that the surface of the main body be kept
clean as much as possible.

2-1 ●External views

 2.2 Main body internal parts arrangement

Inner cover
Makeup
cartridge bottle
(*1)

Ink cartridge bottle(*1)

Makeup
reservoir

Ink reservoir

Lever handle Lever handle

Pressure adjusting screw

Appearance with inner cover removed

Recovery filter 2

Ink filter

Recovery filter 1

Main ink tank

(*1) The Ink cartridge bottle and the makeup cartridge bottle are optional parts.

●Main body internal parts arrangement 2-2

 2.3 Print head

Print head cover lock thumbscrew

Nozzle orifice 1
Charge electrode 1 Nozzle orifice 2

Minus deflection electrode 1 Charge electrode 2

Plus deflection electrode 2

Plus deflection electrode 1
Minus deflection electrode 2
Gutter 1

Gutter 2

2-3 ●Print head

2.4 Screen display
CAUTION
● A touch panel is employed for data entry to operation screen.
When manipulating the Touch panel, use only fingers. If the touch panel is operated
with metal and/or sharp objects such as ball point pen, it may malfunction or break
down.

(1) Print description screen (initial screen)

For details of screen, refer to "4.1 Print description screen (initial screen)".
[New HMI]

Screen name Warning Status Offline/Online Current time

Select Nozzle
Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Operating Time Count Reset Makeup Ink

100 h
TEST
Print Count

1.000 START PRINTING STARTUP Menu

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

● For operation of Menu, refer to "3.3.5 Operation of screen transition(New HMI)".

[Previous HMI]

Screen name Status Warning Offline/Online Current time

Print description [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ABC123 ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋

Twin

1 2

Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink

Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
Print count １０００(prints)
Print Count
Ink pressure 2 ０．２６０ reset

Ink pressure 1 ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

Menu
message message message parameters management

●Screen display 2-4

 (2) Message
For details of message, refer to "9. When Warning or Fault was generated".

[New HMI]

Close
Message name Message type HELP

The Description, FAULT ?

? ×
Cause and Main Ink Tank Too Full No.0002
Solution Message No.
The ink level in the main ink tank is too high.
Cause 1. The valve (MV2) or valve (MV7) is faulty.
2. The High Level sensor in the main ink tank is faulty.
Solution 1. Drain proper amount of ink in the main ink tank.
2. Check the High Level sensor. Button
3. Contact your local distributor.

Reset Close

[Previous HMI]

Message No. Message name HELP

0002 ◆◆◆◆◆ Main Ink Tank Too Full HELP

The ink level in the main ink tank is too high. The Description,
Cause 1. The valve (MV2) or valve (MV7) is faulty. Cause and
2. The High Level sensor in the main ink tank is faulty. Solution
Solution 1. Drain proper amount of ink in the main ink tank.
2. Check the High Level sensor.
3. Contact your local distributor. Button

Reset Close

2-5 ●Screen display

 3. BASIC OPERATION
3.1 Start operation
3.1.1 Start operation

CAUTION
● The ink and makeup contains organic solvents.
When handling the ink and makeup, wear protective gloves and goggles so
that the ink will not directly contact your skin.
● An LCD touch panel is used for the screen.
Do not press the buttons with unreasonable force.
● If the system shuts down, turn off the main power switch.
To turn on the power and reuse the system, see "11. EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES".

1 Remove the print head cover, and check whether or not the print head cover and
the area around the nozzle are soiled by ink.
Around nozzle
Loosen the screw.

Print head cover Pull out.

Since the IJ printer prints by ejecting ink against the print material, the outside and inside of the print
head cover are soiled by splashing of the ink from the print material. To prevent printing problems due to
soiling, check the soiling state and clean as required.
See "1.3 Print head cleaning" for a description of the cleaning method.

2 Turn on the power by pressing the main power switch.

Main power switch

Operating status
Indicator lamps

When stopped only by Stop switch and

the main power switch was not turned off
at the previous operation, the main power
switch does not have to be pressed.

Stop switch On switch

●Start operation 3-1

 3 Press the On switch. (Press for about 2 seconds.)
In the case of turning on the power again, ensure that status indicator lamp is off when On switch is
pressed.
The "Print description" screen shown below appears.
If the "Select login user" screen opened, see "3.1.4 Specifying the login userv".

Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Operating Time Count Reset Makeup Ink

100 h
TEST
Print Count

1.000 START PRINTING STARTUP

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

●Confirm the print description, count value, and calendar character contents.

3-2 ●Start operation

4 Place a piece of wiping paper, etc., against the ink injection port at the end of the print
head and press the STARTUP → Ready .
● Ink is ejected from the nozzle inside the print head.
● Place a piece of wiping paper, etc., against the ink ejection port in preparation for splashing of the ejected ink.

Print head

Wiping paper, etc.

Press STARTUP .

TEST

START PRINTING STARTUP

SETTINGS LOGIN

CONFIRMATION ×

Ink Jet Startup Confirmation No.0050

The ink jet will be turned ON.

Solution 1. To change the printer status to Ready, press <Ready>.

2. To change the printer status to Standby, press <Eject ink>.

Ready Eject ink Cancel

Press Ready .

●Start operation 3-3

 ● Continuous ejection of ink even though not printing is abnormal. If this occurs, stop ink ejection by pressing the
SHUTDOWN → No-cleaning stop .

Press SHUTDOWN .

TEST

START PRINTING SHUTDOWN

SETTINGS LOGIN

CONFIRMATION ×

Shutdown Process Confirmation No.0051

Shutdown will stop the ink jet.

Solution 1. To stop the ink jet, press <OK>.

2. To stop the ink without cleaning, press <No-cleaning stop>.

No-cleaning
OK stop Close

Press No-cleaning stop .

● For a description of subsequent operation, see "3.1.2 When an error occurred at the start of operation".
● At ink ejection, ink may momentarily spurt out and soil the paper. However, this is normal.

5 Wait until the status changes from "Starting" to "Ready".

● When the temperature is low (approximately 20 ℃ or lower), it may take longer than usual for the printer
to enter the "Ready" state.
● Check the Ink pressure.If there is a difference of 0.010 or more from the standard value, adjust the
pressure to the standard value ± 0.002. Refer to Technical manual "6.9 Adjusting the pressure")

6 Input the print target detection signal and check whether or not the print state and
print description are correct.
● If the print target detection signal is input when the status is "Ready", the set print description is printed.

3-4 ●Start operation

3.1.2 When an error occurred at the start of operation

1 Stop ink ejection by pressing the SHUTDOWN → No-cleaning stop .

Press SHUTDOWN .

TEST

START PRINTING SHUTDOWN

SETTINGS LOGIN

CONFIRMATION ×

Shutdown Process Confirmation No.0051

Shutdown will stop the ink jet.

Solution 1. To stop the ink jet, press <OK>.

2. To stop the ink without cleaning, press <No-cleaning stop>.

No-cleaning
OK stop Close

Press No-cleaning stop .

●Start operation 3-5

 2 Loosen the screw and remove the print head cover.

Around nozzle
Loosen the screw.

Pull out.
Print head cover

3 Clean the inside of the cleaning section with makeup.

Clean the nozzle orifice, charge electrode, deflection electrode, gutter, and mounting base with makeup.
(Also see "1.3 Print head cleaning".)

Charge electrode Nozzle Orifice

Cleaning bottle Deflection electrode

Gutter

Mounting base

Glove Area to be cleaned

Beaker

* Thoroughly wipe off the makeup on the surface of each part (including the mounting base) and dry each part
thoroughly with wiping paper.

3-6 ●Start operation

4 With the print head cover removed, press the STARTUP → Ready .

● Ink is ejected from the nozzle. (The status changes from "Stop" to "Starting".
● Operate the unit with the end of the print head remaining inside the beaker.

Press STARTUP .

TEST

START PRINTING STARTUP

SETTINGS LOGIN

CONFIRMATION ×

Ink Jet Startup Confirmation No.0050

The ink jet will be turned ON.

Solution 1. To change the printer status to Ready, press <Ready>.

2. To change the printer status to Standby, press <Eject ink>.

Ready Eject ink Cancel

Press Ready .

●Start operation 3-7

 5 Confirm that the ink stream is at the center of the gutter.
● Check the position of the ink stream from the sides and top of the print head as shown in the figure
and confirm that it is in the center of the gutter.
Ink stream
Gutter entrance diameter

The ink stream

should be positioned
at the center of the
Upper direction gutter inlet.

Gutter

Side direction

● If the ink stream is not at the center of the gutter, perform step 1 and stop the ink injection. After
that, take action in accordance with Technical Manual "6.4 How to correct ink stream bending and
nozzle clogging".

WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask) when checking the position of the ink stream.
● If you should get ink or makeup in your eyes or mouth, immediately wash with warm
water or water and see a doctor.
● When ejecting the ink, do it after confirming that there is no one in the ejection
direction.
(Operate with the end of the print head inserted in a beaker, etc.)

6 Install the print head cover.

● Wait until the status changes to "Ready".
● If the "Cover open" error was displayed, press the Close .

7 Input the print target detection signal and check the printing state.
(See "3.1.1 Start operation".)

3-8 ●Start operation

Ink ejection for maintenance

Use this procedure when you want to eject ink from the nozzle for a purpose other than printing.
(Use only during maintenance. To print, press the STARTUP → Ready .

Press the STARTUP → Eject ink .

Press STARTUP .

TEST

START PRINTING STARTUP

SETTINGS LOGIN

CONFIRMATION ×

Ink Jet Startup Confirmation No.0050

The ink jet will be turned ON.

Solution 1. To change the printer status to Ready, press <Ready>.

2. To change the printer status to Standby, press <Eject ink>.

Ready Eject ink Cancel

Press Eject ink .

● Operation can be aborted by pressing the Cancel at the "Ink Jet Startup Confirmation message".
● If the print head cover installed, the printer will not enter the Ready state even if this operation is
performed. (Enters the Standby state)

●Start operation 3-9

 3.1.3 Ready and Standby state switching operation
(1) "Ready" state → "Standby" state switching
● With the conveyor interlock being activated by "Ready" signal, should this "Ready" signal be
turned to "Standby", the conveyor will stop.

1 Press READY on the upper of the screen, and the message "Print Abort
Confirmation" appears. Then press OK .

Press READY .

Print description READY OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Operating Time Count Reset Makeup Ink

100 h
TEST
Print Count

1.000 START PRINTING SHUTDOWN

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

CONFIRMATION ×

Print Abort Confirmation No.0184

Printing will be aborted.

Solution Press <OK> to abort.

OK Cancel

Press OK .

3-10 ●Start operation

(2) "Standby" state → "Ready" state switching

1 Press STANDBY on the upper of the screen, and the message "Print Confirmation"
appears. Then press OK .

Press STANDBY .

Print description STANDBY OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Operating Time Count Reset Makeup Ink

100 h
TEST
Print Count

1.000 START PRINTING SHUTDOWN

HOME
HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

CONFIRMATION ×

Print Confirmation No.0183

The newly created print data will be printed.

Solution Press <OK> to print.

OK Cancel

Press OK .

●Start operation 3-11

 3.1.4 Specifying the login user
(1) Functions
● Specifies the user to be logged in at power-on.
● Selects the user and inputs the password when logging in.
● The administrator defines the user name and password and password protection setting in advance.
The password protection setting can be changed beforehand for each user. The user name must be within
12 digits.
● Sets whether or not to select a user which logs in when the power is turned on.
See the Technical Manual "3.3 Selecting login user when power is turned on".

(2) Operation
The administrator sets the login procedure necessary at power-on beforehand.

1 Turn on the power.

The Select login user screen is displayed.
This icon shows "Administrator". This icon shows "User".
Select login user × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

admin user2 user3

The saved user admin4 user5 admin6

names are
displayed.
user7 admin8

2 Press user name user2 .

The password input window opens.
Select login user × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Input the password of The window

admin user2 user3 will close.
user name “user2”.
Password ×

admin04 user05 7
admin06 8 9 Back space
Q W E R T Y U I O P × 4 5 6
A S user07
D F G Hadmin08
J K L Enter 1 2 3
Aa Z X C V B N M 0 Enter

Shift
Cursor

Enter
3 Input the password for user name “user2” and press Enter .
The initial screen is displayed.

3-12 ●Start operation

3.2 Shut down operation
3.2.1 Automatically stopping by pressing one button

1 Press the Stop switch. (Press for about 2 seconds.)

All operations up to IJ printer power OFF are performed automatically.

Main power switch

Stop switch On switch

The power is turned OFF by Stop switch from the state in which ink is being ejected or being stopped.
(The main power switch does not have to be turned off. The power consumption does not change even
if the main power switch remains ON.)

●Shut down operation 3-13

 3.2.2 Stopping ink ejection by pressing the screen button
● Perform ink stop processing using the following procedure.

1 Press the SHUTDOWN → OK .

A confirmation screen is displayed.

Press SHUTDOWN .

TEST

START PRINTING SHUTDOWN

SETTINGS LOGIN

CONFIRMATION ×

Shutdown Process Confirmation No.0052

Shutdown will stop the ink jet.

Solution 1. To stop the ink jet, press <OK>.

2. To stop the ink without cleaning, press <No-cleaning stop>.
3. To execute the auto power shutdown process after ink stop.
press <STOP>.
No-cleaning
OK stop STOP Close

Stops ink jet. Turns OFF the power after ink jet is stopped.

3-14 ●Shut down operation

3.2.3 Turning off the main power switch
● Press Stop switch normally instead of main power switch to turn off the power at the end of operation.
● If the IJ printer will not be used for a long time, turn off the main power switch.
● Do not turn off the main power switch while ink is being ejected.
See "11. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES".
● The state when the power is turned on at the next operation differs depending on the state when the main
power switch was turned off.

Turn off method Method which displays a screen at the next operation
When the main power switch was
Screen is displayed when the startup switch is turned
turned off after being stopped by
ON after the main power switch was turned ON.
Stop switch.
When the main power switch was
Screen is displayed when the main power switch is
turned off without using the stop
turned ON.
switch

●Shut down operation 3-15

 Handling the nozzle rubber seal

1. The "nozzle rubber seal" prevents drying of the nozzle orifice and dust from sticking to the
plate. When the IJ printer will not be used for several days over a holiday, etc., we
recommend that the "nozzle rubber seal" be installed between the nozzle orifice and charge
electrode at shutdown.

Nozzle orifice
Nozzle rubber seal

Nozzle rubber seal

Charge electrode

Usage precautions
1 Store the "nozzle rubber seal" in a plastic bag, etc., to protect it from dirt and dust.
2 Always install the "nozzle rubber seal" after cleaning it with makeup.
3 When installing the “nozzle rubber seal”, be careful not to deform the charge
electrode.

3-16 ●Shut down operation

3.3 Basic operation
3.3.1 Operating Scheme (New HMI)

Power ON Power OFF

OPEN

EDIT
SAVE [Input]

EDIT
ADJUST [Size & Intervals]

HOME
(Print description)
EDIT
EDIT [Adjustment Plus]

EDIT
[Speed Adjustment]

EDIT
[Timer & Other]

Calibration
SETTINGS touch screen
coordinates

LOGIN
: Screen name

* The new HMI screens can move directly to other displays without going back to HOME screen.
* "Ink eject" and "Ink stop" can operate only when HOME screen is displayed.
* Please refer to "3.3.3 Change procedure of (New HMI) ⇔ (Previous HMI)" for the change procedure of the
operation scheme (New HMI) and (Previous HMI).

●Basic operation 3-17

 3.3.2 Operating Scheme (Previous HMI)
(1) Overall view

For print target data

Change message
Power ON Power OFF
Change message Print format

Edit message
Select message
Print description
(Menu 1)
Print specifications
Overwrite
message

Various
Print Setup
Adjust print
parameters
* See next page, Change message

Operation
management

For save data

Maintenance
menu Change message

Print format

Auxiliary function
menu
Edit message

Print description
(Menu 2)
Environment setup Print specifications
menu

Various
Select Print Setup
login user

Create/Edit
Change message
message
: Screen name

3-18 ●Basic operation

(2) Change message

Adjust
Print format Inter-character
space Substitution
* The display can be rules
switched between screens
Edit message,
Print format, and Calendar
Print specifications. Shift code setup
conditions
Change message
Edit message
Time count
conditions
Count conditions

Print specifications

Various print
setup

: Screen name

●Basic operation 3-19

 (3) Environment setup menu, Auxiliary menu, Maintenance menu

Environment setup User environment Maintenance

Unit information
menu setup menu

Date / time Operation

setup management

Communication
environment Test print
setup

Touch screen Excitation

setup V update
(Nozzle test)

Login View alarm

management history

Circulation control

View software
version
Auxiliary function Manage
menu messages / Group
Comm. monitor
Create
user pattern
Password
protection
Calibration touch
screen coordinates
Solenoid valve/
pump test
Copy data
(IJP → USB)
Periodic
replacement
Copy data part mgmt.
(USB → IJP)

Edit standard
pattern

Edit substitution
rules

Select languages

3-20 ●Basic operation

 3.3.3 Change procedure of (New HMI) ⇔ (Previous HMI)
(1)Change procedure of (New HMI) ⇒ (Previous HMI)

1 The new HMI screen is displayed.

2 Press menu LOGIN .

The Select login user screen will be displayed.

This icon shows "Administrator". This icon shows "User"

Select login user × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Current User ID：user9

admin user2 user3

The saved user user4 user5 admin6

names are
displayed.
user7 admin8 user9

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

3 Press the administrator name admin .

The password input window opens.

Select login user × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Current User ID：user9

The window
Inputs the password
admin user2 user3 will close.
of user name
"admin". Password ×

admin04 user05 7
admin06 8 9 Back space

Q W E R T Y U I O P × 4 5 6
A S user07
D F G Hadmin08
J K L Enter 1 2 3
Aa Z X C V B N M 0 Enter

Shift
Cursor

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

●Basic operation 3-21

 Enter
4 Input the password for the administrator name "admin" and press Enter .
Logs in again using administrator name "admin" and the touch screen returns to the Print description
screen (Previous HMI) is displayed.

Print description [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ABC123 ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋

Twin

1 2

Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink

Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
Print count １０００(prints)
Print Count
Ink pressure 2 ０．２６０ reset

Ink pressure 1 ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

Menu
message message message parameters management

3-22 ●Basic operation

(2)Change procedure of (Previous HMI) ⇒ (New HMI)

Setup on "Touch screen setup" is necessary to display the New HMI screens.
For details, refer to Technical Manual "3.5 Human Machine Interface [HMI] setup".

1 The previous HMI screen is displayed.

2 Press Login management in the environment setup menu.

The Login management menu is displayed.

Login management menu [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Displays the Makeup Ink

history of
logged in
Manual Startup
users.
Login history Select login user Password setup
HOME

Select login Set the password.

User conditions Using environment
user setup setup
However, it is not
displayed when
Conditions authorization is not
setup given from the
Create new User ID Delete User ID
administrator.

New user ID
create Select the login
method.
Back

3 Press Select login user .

The Select login user screen is displayed.

Select login user [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Current user ID : user9

The user ID currently
logged in is displayed.

admin user2 user3

The saved user

name is displayed.
user4 user5 user6

user7 user8 user9

Back

●Basic operation 3-23

 4 Press user name user2 .
A password input window opens.
[Caution] Administrator user can't transfer to New HMI screens.

Select login user [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Current user ID : user9

admin user2 user3

Cancel
← → Enter
User4 User5 User6 Enter
Inputs the password Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ ABC
of user name "user2". Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ 123 Delete
User7 User8 User9
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ Change Change

Back

5 Enter the password of user name “user2”, and press Enter Enter .
Logs in again using user name "user2" and the touch screen returns to the Print description
screen (New HMI) is displayed.

Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Operating Time Count Reset Makeup Ink

100 h
TEST
Print Count

1.000 START PRINTING STARTUP

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

3-24 ●Basic operation

3.3.4 Status
(1) The printer is in one of the following states.

No. State Description

1 Stop The ink is stopped. No deflection voltage is applied.
2 Standby The ink is ejected. No deflection voltage is applied.
The ink is ejected. The deflection voltage is applied (printing is permitted by the
3 Ready
sensor signal).
4 Starting State in which the printer changes from the inactive state to the standby state.
5 Ink heating Start up in process, with the ink being heated.
6 Stopping State in which the printer changes from the standby state to the stop state.
7 Drop adjust Period during which ink particles are not properly charged in the standby state.
8 Cover open Period during which the nozzle head cover is open in the standby state
9 Service Circulation control process for maintenance task execution.
10 Fault State in which a fault exists.

(2) The current states including the on-line/off-line (communication) state is constantly displayed at the top
of the screen.
(a) New HMI
Ready status On line

Print description READY ONLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

ID:User2

Stop status Off line

Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

ID:User2

(b) Previous HMI

Ready status On line

Print description [Ready ] com=1 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Current user ID : user2

《 》
Manual Shutdown

Stop status Off line

Print description [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Current user ID : user2

《 》 Manual Startup

●Basic operation 3-25

 (3) When there is a "Not reset alarm", a Warning is displayed.
When the Warning is pressed, a warning list is displayed.
(a) New HMI
Press Warning .

Print description READY ONLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Twin
2
1 − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Press Ink Low Warning .

Warning list
WARNING ×

Ink Low Warning

Makeup Low Warning

WARNING ×

Ink Low Warning No.0081

The ink level in the ink reservoir is low.

Cause 1. The ink reservoir is almost empty.
2. The Low Level sensor in the ink reservoir is faulty.
Solution 1. Replace the Ink Cartridge within 60 minutes.
2. Check the Low Level sensor.

CLOSE

(b) Previous HMI

Press Warning .

Print description [Ready ] Warning 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0
Message name[ ] Current user ID : user2

《 》
Manual Shutdown

Warning list Press Ink Low Warning .

Ink Low Warning

Makeup Low Warning

Cancel

◇◇◇◇◇ Ink Low Warning ◇◇◇◇◇

The ink level in the ink reservoir is low.

Cause 1. The ink reservoir is almost empty.
2. The Low Level sensor in the ink reservoir is faulty.
Solution 1. Replace the Ink Cartridge within 60 minutes.
2. Check the Low Level sensor.

Close

3-26 ●Basic operation

 3.3.5 Operation of screen transition (New HMI)
(1) Overview
●In New HMI screens, Menu buttons at the button of the screen can make the screen move to another screen.

Item Description Reference

● Start/stop ink ejection.
HOME ● Replace ink/makeup cartridge.
4.1
(Print description) ● Display the print layout and operatimg
information.
OPEN ● Calls and prints saved messages. 4.3
● Saves created messages.
SAVE The save procedure can select "overwrite 4.4, 4.6
message" or "new message".
● Creates and edits messages different from the
ADJUST 4.15.4
current message.
● By pressing Edit button during printing, you can
input print data or you can change print
EDIT 4.6
specifications such as the character height and
character width.
SETTINGS ● Displays operation status. 5.2
● Logs in again as a different user from currently
LOGIN 6.4
logged in user.

(2) Procedure of screen transition

1 The print description screen (New HMI) is displayed.

Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Twin
2
1 − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Operating Time Ink Presure

（Standard Value：0.255） Makeup Ink

100 h ０．255 ＭＰａ

The button by which ０．255
the screen is displayed Print Count TEST

is now inactive and

shows . 1.000 START PRINTING STARTUP The buttons which
can make the
screen move to
another screen are
HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN shown active.

●Basic operation 3-27

 2 Press menu EDIT .
The Edit screen (New HMI) will be displayed.
Save × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45
ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

(6/500)
ABC１２３・ (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 × Delete Insert

Q W E R T Y U I O P copy Paste

#+= A S D F G H J K L Enter

Aa Z X C V B N M Space

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

ホーム

3-28 ●Basic operation

 3.3.6 Basic operation to change the settings
3.3.6-1 New HMI
(1) Overview
●There are 2 types of settings.

Set value confirmation

No. Classification Set value change method
method
When "configurable icon" is
The numerical value is displayed, display the numerical
1 Setting of value
displayed on the screen. window by pressing the numerical
value and input the value.
When "Slectable icon" is displayed,
The set value selection is display the selection menu window by
2 Setting of selection
displayed on the screen. pressing the set value and select the set
value from the items.

(2) Operation ("Adjust print parameters screen (New HMI)" is used as an

example.)
●There are 2 types of settings.

Adjust print parameters × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Twin
2
1 − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Selectable icon
Configurable icon

Displays
information of Character Height Print Start Delay Scanning Unit Reciprocative Print Start Delay
Nozzle 2. 99 4 Scanning Unit
− ＋ − SC ＋
96 5 ０
SC
Forward
Displays
information of Character Width Pulse Rate Div. Factor
Direction
0
Nozzle 1. −
0 ＋ −
1/ 1 ＋ Reverse ０
SC
0 1/ 1 Direction
0

1 "Character Height" setting (Value input)

Display the numerical window by pressing the numerical value and input the value.
Adjust print parameters × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Twin
2
1 − 100% ＋ ID:User2 Displays the
configurable range.

The numerical window

is closed and the value
The background stays as same before.
color is changed by
pressing the value.
×
Minimum value is input.
Character Height Range ：0-99
Print Start Delay Scanning Unit Reciprocative Print Start Delay
99 7 8 4
9 AC Scanning Unit Back space.
− ＋ − SC ＋
96 5 ０
4 5 6 × Forward
SC
Character Width Pulse Rate Div. Factor
Direction
0
1 32
−
0 ＋ −
1/ 1 ＋ Reverse ０
SC
0 1/ENT
0 -1 +1 1 Direction
0

The numerical window is closed and

the input value is reflected on the screen.

●Basic operation 3-29

 2 "Scanning Unit" setting (Item select)
Display the selection menu window by pressing the set value and select the set value from the items.

Adjust print parameters × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Twin
2
1 − 100% ＋ ID:User2

The background
color is changed by The selection menu
pressing the set window is closed and
value. the set value stays
×
as same before.
Character Height Print Start Delay Scanning Unit Reciprocative Print Start Delay
99 4 ScanningScanning
unit（SC)Unit
− ＋ − SC ＋
96 5 ０
Character
Forward unit（CH)
SC
Character Width Pulse Rate Div. Factor
Direction
0 When the selection
Length mm（mm) is enabled, the item
−
0 ＋ −
1/ 1 ＋ Reverse ０
SC becomes activated.
0 1/ 1 Direction
0

When the selection is

disabled, the item
becomes inactivated.

3-30 ●Basic operation

3.3.6-2 Previous HMI
(1) Overview
●There are 3 types of settings.

Set value confirmation

No. Classification Set value change method
method
Display the numerical
The numerical value is dis-
window by pressing the
1 Setting of value played on the numeric but-
numeric button and input the
tons.
value.
Setting with few selections.
(All selection buttons are The pressed button
2 Press the applicable button.
displayed: mainly a choice becomes yellow.
between the two)
Settings with many selections. Display the selection menu
The set value selection is
(When a button is pressed, a window by pressing the but-
3 displayed on the input
selection menu is displayed in a ton and select the
button.
window.) relevant item.

(2) Operation (Maintenance "Excitation V update" screen is used as an

example.)
● There are 3 types of settings.

Excitation V update [Standby ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Makeup Ink

Excitation V-ref.：Nozzle2 − 11 ＋ (0∼19)

Manual Shutdown
Excitation V-ref.：Nozzle1 − 11 ＋ (0∼19)
Ref. ambient temperature 20 (℃) HOME

Automatic update Inc.

Incremental change 1 (1∼9)
Print trigger source Button input Sensor
Print data For test Data to be displayed

1 "Excitation V-ref." setting (Value input)

Display the numerical window by pressing the numbers button and input the value.

Press the numeric button.

The numerical window is
Excitation V update [Standby ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
closed and the value stays
Makeup Ink
as same before.
− 11 ＋ (0∼19)
Excitation V-ref.：Nozzle2
１１ Manual Shutdown
− 11 ＋ (0∼19)
7 8 9
Excitation V-ref.：Nozzle1
Cancel
Ref. ambient temperature 20 (℃) HOME

Automatic update Inc. 4 5 6 Clear

Incremental change 1 1
(1∼9) 2 3 Incre-
ment
Minimum value is input.
0 ← →
Print trigger source Button input Sensor
Decre-
ment
Enter
Print data For test Data to be displayed Each time this button is
Twin pressed, the set value is
increased by 1.
The numerical window is closed
Numerical windows displayed. and the input value is reflected
on the screen.
Each time this button is pressed,
the set value is decreased by 1.

●Basic operation 3-31

 2 "Scanning Unit" setting
Press the applicable button.

Excitation V update [Standby ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Makeup Ink

Excitation V-ref.：Nozzle2 − 11 ＋ (0∼19)

Manual Shutdown
Excitation V-ref.：Nozzle1 − 11 ＋ (0∼19)
Ref. ambient temperature 20 (℃) HOME

Automatic update Inc.

Incremental change 1 (1∼9)
Print trigger source Button input Sensor
Print data For test Data to be displayed

Press the Button input .

3 "Automatic update" setting

Display the selection menu window by pressing the button and close from within that window.

Excitation V update [Standby ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Makeup Ink

Excitation V-ref.：Nozzle2 − 11 ＋ (0∼19)

Manual Shutdown
Excitation V-ref.：Nozzle1 − 11 ＋ (0∼19)
Ref. ambient temperature 20 (℃) HOME

Automatic update Inc.

The selection menu
Incremental change 1 (0∼19)
(1∼9) window is closed and the
Disable
Print trigger source (℃) input Sensor
Button
Dec. set value stays as same
Print data ForInc.
test Data to be displayed
Cancel
before.
Twin

Press the button.

Selection menu window is displayed.

3-32 ●Basic operation

3.3.7 Operations (OK, Back, Apply) which exit from a screen
(Previous HMI)
(1) Overview
● There are 2 types of setup screens.

No. Classification Contents

● When OK OK is pressed, the set contents are accepted
and the display returns to the previous screen.
Screens with OK OK
1 ● When Cancel is pressed, the set contents are canceled
Cancel
and Cancel Cancel
and the display returns to the previous screen.
● Apply is not displayed.
Apply

● When Back is pressed, the display returns to the

Back

previous screen.
● When Apply is pressed, the set contents are accepted.
Apply
2 Screens with Back
● When Back
Back
was pressed in the state in which
Back

Apply is not pressed, a confirmation window is displayed

Apply

and action is requested.

● When "Apply" was performed during editing of the current message and at the User environment setup
screen, the set contents are reflected in printing.
● For the setup of whether or not to show some buttons as icon, refer to "6.3 setup the touch screen".

(2) Screen examples

1 Screen with OK OK and Cancel Cancel

[Example of Date/time setup screen]

Date/time setup [Ready ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink
Current time ２０１８ (year) ０７ (month) ０７ (day)
１２ (hour) ４５ (minute) ４５ (second) Manual Shutdown

Calendar time control same as current time clock stop

HOME
Calendar time
２０１８ (year) ０７ (month) ０７ (day)
１２ (hour) ４５ (minute) ４５ (second)
Clock system
24-hour clock 12-hour clock
Cancel

● Press OK to apply the date/time setup. Cancel

Cancel When set without
● The current time affects the clock display only icons at the Touch
when changes are made. screen setup screen.
● Calendar character will be printed based on "calendar time"
OK OK

OK

●Basic operation 3-33

 [Example of Save message screen]

Save message [Ready ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Save message as (name) ＡＢＣ００１

Manual Shutdown
Group No. ０１ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１

HOME
Free space 20%

Cancel
Cancel

Simple list
OK
OK

2 Screen with Back button

[Example of Print format screen]

Print format [Ready ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Apply Manual
Shut
Manual Shutdown down
− ＋
Apply HOME
Apply HOME
Column 101 Column 101
0：A B Item 101 Item 101
→ Char. count Char. count
6 / 500 6 / 500
Select line 1st line 2nd line
When set without
Bold 1 （times 1- 9）
Twin icons at the Touch Twin
Bar code none screen setup screen.
Edit Edit
message message
Inter-char. space 00 Print Print
(MAX 14 ) Line 0 spec. spec.
spacing
Dot matrix 10x24 (MAX 0 ) Adjustment Adjustment
char. cond. char. cond.

Back Back
⋮

1 line 2 lines Delete Col. Insert Col. Add Col. To Overall Back

3-34 ●Basic operation

[Example of confirmation message when Back was pressed]

Print format [Ready ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Shutdown
− ＋
Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Row 101
→ 使用文字数
＝＝＝＝＝ Data Entry Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝
6 / 500
変更段数指定 1st line 2nd line
一括設定
横倍角 1 （横倍
The data entered will 1∼9）
be used in the print message.
バーコード なし
Solution 1. To save the input data and use it for print message, press <OK>.
文字入力
2. To delete the input data, press <Cancel changes>.
3. To return to the previous screen, press <Cancel>. 印字仕様
文字間スペース 02 段間スペース 2

文字サイズ 12x16 文字間調整

OK Cancel Cancel
changes 登録
⋮

1 line 2 lines Delete C. Insert C. Add Col. To Overall Back

Accepts the Return from set Closes the message window with the
set contents. contents to original set contents remaining displayed.
contents.

●Basic operation 3-35

 4. CREATION AND PRINTING OF MESSAGES
4.1 Print description screen (initial screen)
(1) Overview
● The display is shifted to the screens for message edit and Maintenance, Auxiliary function, and
Environment setup menu screens by pressing each button.
● The print image can be confirmed at the "Print layout" area.
● The operational items in Print description screen (New HMI) are different from those in Print description
screen (Previous HMI).
(a) New HMI
Item Description Reference
STARTUP / SHUTDOWN ● Start/stop ink ejection. 3
START PRINTING ● The current print data will be printed. 5.3
● The ink pressure or the filter replacement time
is displayed.
5.2
Operating information ● For the display item of operating
Technical Manual 3.5
information, please select it on the Touch screen
setup screen.
Print count reset ● Reset the print count to zero (0). 4.1
● Reset the count value to a preset value.
4.14
Count reset ● To show the Count reset button, please set on
Technical Manual 3.5
the Touch screen setup screen.
Cartridge replacement ● Replace ink/makeup cartridge. 8
Displays the scroll.
Select nozzle.
Displays the zoom in or zoom out.
Displays the nickname. Displays the print layout.

Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45 Displays the operation

ABC123
2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2 management information.
Displays remaining
level of Cartridge.
< >
This button is activated when
the Cartridge shall be replaced.

Operating Time Ink Presure

（Standard Value：0.255） Makeup Ink

100 h ０．
００2
ＭＰａ
０．
００１
TEST
Print Count

1.000 START PRINTING STARTUP

TEST

START PRINTING SHUTDOWN

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

Print count is reset Press menu icon, and go to The SHUTDOWN is displayed
to 0. respective screen. during ink ejection.
It is activated in
off-line state. The STARTUP is displayed
during stop.

4-1 ●Print description screen

(b) Previous HMI
Item Description Reference
Change message ● Edits and corrects current message. 4.2
Select message ● Calls and prints saved messages. 4.3
Overwrite message ● Overwrites the current message. 4.4
Adjust print parameters ● Creates and edits messages different from the current message. 4.15.4
Operation management ● Displays operation status. 5.2
Maintenance ● Displays the maintenance menu. 5
Auxiliary function ● Displays the auxiliary functions menu. 7
Environment setup menu ● Displays the environment setup menu 6
Select login user ● Logs in again as a different user from currently logged in user. 6.4
Create/Edit message ● Creates and edits messages different from the current message. 4.5
Print count reset ● Reset the print count to zero (0). 4.1
Cartridge replacement ● Replace ink/makeup cartridge. 8
2018.07.07 12:45
Com=0

The Shutdown is displayed during ink ejection.

Manual Shutdown
The Startup is displayed during stop.

Displays the zoom in or zoom out.

Displays the scroll. Displays the print layout.

Print description [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0

Select nozzle.
Message name[ ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋ For details regarding the printing
method display, refer to "4.15.1
Twin Set the character height,
1 2 character width, and orientation."
Displays remaining level of Cartridge.
This button is activated when the
Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink Cartridge shall be replaced.
Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
Print count １０００(prints) Print count Print count is reset to 0.
Ink pressure 2 : ０．２６０
reset It is indicated in off-line state.
Ink pressure 1 : ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

Displays the operation
Menu
message message message parameters management management information.

When the Menu is pressed,

the display is switched.
Auxiliary Environment Select Create/Edit
Maintenance
function setup menu login user message

●Print description screen 4-2

 (2) Reset the print count
(a) New HMI

1 Press menu HOME .

The Print description screen will be displayed.

Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

2
ABC123 1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Operating Time Ink Presure

（Standard Value：0.255）
Makeup Ink

100 h ０．255
ＭＰａ
０．255
TEST
Print Count

1.000 START PRINTING STARTUP

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

Print count reset

2 Press the Print count reset .

Confirmation message of "Print count reset" will be displayed.

3 Press OK on the confirmation message window.

Print count will be reset to zero(0).

(b) Previous HMI

The Print description screen is displayed.

Print description [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0
Message name[ ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋

Twin

1 2

Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink

１００(hours)
Cumulative op. time
Print count reset
Print count １０００(prints) Print count
reset
Ink pressure 2 : ０．２６０
Ink pressure 1 : ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

message Menu
message message parameters management

1 Press the Print count reset on the Print description screen.

Confirmation message of "Print count reset" will be displayed.

2 Press OK on the confirmation message window.

Print count will be reset to zero (0).

4-3 ●Print description screen

(3) Current message and saved message
● There are 2 types of messages; current messages and saved messages.
Types of messages
Type Features
● The message currently being printed is called "current message".
● When the power is turned on, the last current message is memorized.
● The print layout of the current message is displayed on the Print description
Current message
screen.
● The contents of the current message can be changed by calling the message
from the saved messages.
● Messages can be given a message name. Multiple messages can be saved
Saved message
beforehand.

●Print description screen 4-4

 4.2 Edit messages to be printed (Change message screen)
(1) Overview
● Edits the current message (message currently being printed).
● There are 4 types of print format.
● Style displayed in the Details mode of the message name list display of the Select message screen shows the
type of print format.
Types of Style
Type of Style Meaning Features
(a) Individual Individual setup of fixed layout Multiple character sizes can be mixed.
Character size and inter-character space set
(b) Overall Overall setup of fixed layout value are matched at all lines.
Only 1 column can be input.
An arbitrary position can be set for each print
(c) Free layout Setup of free layout
item.
Characters can be printed by rotated 90-degrees
(d) Right angle print Setup of Right-angled printing
toward their direction of transport.

(a) Individual setup

A B C D E F G
ＸＹ
Print items are stacked
from the bottom.
２０１７ ． １２ ． ３１

Columns (vertical list) with the same Columns of several different

line count, line spacing, and character formats can be input.
size list are linked and handled.
(b) Overall setup

Print items are stacked A B C D E F G

from the bottom.
２０１７ ． １２ ． ３１

Only one column (vertical list) with the same line count,
line spacing, and character size list is handled.
(c) Free layout
２０１７ ． １２ ． ３１

E F G
A B C D
ＸＹ
An arbitrary position can be A print item can be lapped over
set for each print item. other print items.

4-5 ●Edit messages to be printed

 (d) Right-angled printing

Direction of
transport

Char.
①②③④⑤⑥⑦⑧⑨⑩⑪⑫
Nozzle 2
Direction of
transport
Nozzle 1
3rd line
2nd line
1st line
3rd 2nd 1st line

Normal printing Right-angled printing

●The background of the current message edit screen is colored.

Edit screen background color
Editing objective Background color
Current message Light green
Saved message Gray

● When the Apply Apply

is pressed during editing, the input value is applied and reflected in printing.
The input value is also applied when returning to the Print description screen by pressing the Back . Back

● When the Back is pressed at the Print format, Print specifications, and Edit message, various print setup
Back

screens, the confirmation message "Data Entry Confirmation" is displayed.

Functions of confirmation message "Data Entry Confirmation"
Button Contents
OK Applies the message by input value and switches to the Print description screen.
Cancel changes Cancels the input value and returns to the state before the change.
Cancel Returns to the original screen with the input data as it was.

●Edit messages to be printed 4-6

 (2) Operation
The Print description screen is shown below.

Print description [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0
Message name[ ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋

Twin

1 2

Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink

Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
Print count １０００(prints) Print count
reset
Ink pressure 2 : ０．２６０
Ink pressure 1 : ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

message Menu
message message parameters management

Change message

1 Press the Change message on the Print description screen.

The Print format screen is displayed.

Change message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋
HOME

Print Edit Print Various

Twin
format message spec. print setup
<Format Setup>
Individual
setup
:Multiple print formats can be mixed.

Overall :Character size and inter-character space set

setup
value are matched at all lines.
Only 1 column can be input.

Free layout :An arbitrary position can be set for each print Save and Back
item.

Right angle
:Rotate characters 90 degrees to print.
print Back

2 Press Individual setup , Overall setup or Free layout or Right angle print to
modify <Format setup>.

3 Edits the Print format, Print specifications, and Edit message, various print
setup screens.

4 Press the Back Back .

To save as a registered print data, press save and back .

4-7 ●Edit messages to be printed

4.3 Call and print saved messages
(1) Overview
● Calls and prints saved messages.
● The message currently being printed is called "Current message".
● When a message is called during printing, the Print description display changes to the called message and
printing continues to print the previous contents. The printed result changes from the next printing.
● The desired message can be efficiently found by changing the display contents of the message name list.
● A print image of the registered print data can be checked.

Method of changing the message name list display (a) New HMI
Item Contents
● Press the group folder icon.
● Only the messages which belong to the selected group are displayed.
Group
● When "0:All message names" is selected, the message names of all
the groups are displayed.
Scroll up, Scroll down ● Switches the message name list display screen.
● The sort order can be switched by pressing the heading part of the
Sort
message name list display.
● Defines Group No. as "00" and the search conditions as space, then
Display All
displays message name list.
● Details displays the "Update date/time", "Style", "group No." as
Details, Simple List well as the "No." and "Message name".
● Simple List displays the "No." and "Message name".
● When the message name is selected, the print image of the registered
Preview print data can be checked.
● The print contents currently being printed are not affected.

●Call and print saved messages 4-8

 Method of changing the message name list display (b)Previous HMI
Item Contents
● Press the group No. button.
● Only the messages belonging to the selected group are displayed.
Group
● When "0:All message names" is selected, the message names of all
the groups are displayed.
Previous display, next display ● Switches the message name list display screen.
Select page ● Selects the message name list page.
● The sort order can be switched by pressing the heading part of the
Sort
message name list display.
● The first several characters of a message name are input and only the
message names beginning with those characters are displayed.
Search
● If the Search conditions are not input, all the message names in that
group are displayed.
● Defines Group No. as "00" and the search condition as space, then
Display All
displays message name list.
● Details displays the "Update date/time", "Style", and "Group No.",
Details, Simple list as well as the "No." and "Message name".
● Simple List displays the "No." and "Message name".
● By pressing Free number , all the registered numbers will be
displayed.
● Nicknames will be sorted and displayed in ascending sequence of
Free number
Registration numbers.
● Search by Group No. or Search condition input or Display all is
NOT available.
● A print image of the registered print data can be checked by
Preview Preview .
● The print contents currently being printed are not affected.

●Style displayed in the Details mode shows the type of print format.
Types of Style
Type of style Meaning
Individual Individual setup of fixed layout.
Overall Overall setup of fixed layout
Free Set up of free layout.

90° Setup of Right-angled printing

4-9 ●Call and print saved messages

(2) Operation
(a) New HMI

1 Press menu OPEN .

The Open screen will be displayed.
Current massage
Group folder Group Sort
name

Open × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Current Message Name：SAMPLE 1

Details or
Group 00 Details
Simple List
No. Message Name No. Message Name

1 ＡＢＣ００１ 1１ ＡＢＣ００５

２ ＡＢＣ００２ １２ Ａ０１

３ ＡＢＣ００３ １３ Ｂ
Scroll up ,
４ ＬＭＮ１０ １４ Ｃ
Scroll down
５ ＬＭＮ２０ １５ Ｄ

１０ ＡＢＣ００４ 2１ ＬＭＮ３０

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

Example of Details screen

Sort

Group 00 Simple List

No. Message Name Update Date/Time Style

1 ＡＢＣ００１ 2018.06.01 12:00 OVERALL

２ ＡＢＣ００２ 2018.06.02 12:00 OVERALL

３ ＡＢＣ００３ 2018.06.03 12:00 OVERALL

４ ＬＭＮ１０ 2018.06.04 12:00 INDIV.

５ ＬＭＮ２０ 2018.06.05 12:00 INDIV.

１０ ＡＢＣ００４ 2018.06.06 12:00 INDIV.

2 Change the display contents using Group, Sort, Scroll up / Scroll down, Display
All, so that the desired message name is displayed.
3 Select the message.
Confirmation message of "Select message confirmation" will be displayed.
A print image can be chacked by preview.

4 Press OK on the confirmation message window.

The selected message is called and the display returns to the Print description screen.

●Call and print saved messages 4-10

 (b) Previous HMI

1 Press the Select message on the Print description screen.

The Select message screen is displayed.

Group Sort
Select message [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name Previous display ,
Search conditions １ ＡＢＣ００１ １５ Ｄ Next display
input ２ ＡＢＣ００２ ２１ ＬＭＮ３０
３ ＡＢＣ００３ ２２ ＬＭＮ４０ Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp. Select page
４ ＬＭＮ１０ ２３ ＬＭＮ５０ Select page
５ ＬＭＮ２０ ２４ ＬＭＮ６０ 1/3
１０ ＡＢＣ００４ ３０ Ｅ０１
Cancel
Preview
１１ ＡＢＣ００５ ３１ Ｅ０２
１２ Ａ０１ ３２ Ｅ０３ Preview
１３ Ｂ ３３ Ｅ０４
Display All
１４ Ｃ ３４ Ｅ０５ Display
All

Free number Details OK OK

Free number Details or Simple list

Example of Details screen

Select message [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

HOME
No△ Message name Update Date/Time Style GrNo
１ ＡＢＣ００１ 2017.06.01 12:00 OVERALL 1
２ ＡＢＣ００２ 2017.06.02 12:00 OVERALL 1
３ ＡＢＣ００３ 2017.06.03 12:00 OVERALL 1 Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
４ ＬＭＮ１０ 2017.06.04 12:00 INDIV. 3 Select page
５ ＬＭＮ２０ 2017.06.05 12:00 INDIV. 3 1/3
１０ ＡＢＣ００４ 2017.06.06 12:00 INDIV. 5
１１ ＡＢＣ００５ 2017.06.07 12:00 INDIV. 5 Cancel
１２ Ａ０１ 2017.06.08 12:00 INDIV. 5
１３ Ｂ 2017.06.09 12:00 FREE 5
１４ Ｃ 2017.06.10 12:00 FREE 5 Display
All

Free number Simple list OK

4-11 ●Call and print saved messages

 By pressing Free number , the screen shown below will be displayed.
Select message [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45
Com=0

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

HOME
No Message name No Message name
１ ＡＢＣ００１ １１ ＡＢＣ００５
２ ＡＢＣ００２ １２ Ａ０１
３ ＡＢＣ００３ １３ Ｂ Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
４ ＬＭＮ１０ １４ C Select page
５ ＬＭＮ２０ １５ D 1/100
６ １６
７ １７ Cancel
８ １８
９ １９
１０ ＡＢＣ００４ ２０

Free number Details OK

By pressing Preview , the screen shown below will be displayed.

Select message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

− ＋ HOME

No△ Message name No△ Message name

１ ＡＢＣ００１ １５ ＡＢＣ００５
２ ＡＢＣ００２ ２１ Ａ０１
３ ＡＢＣ００３ ２２ Ｂ
４ ＬＭＮ１０ ２３ C
５ ＬＭＮ２０ ２４ D
Preview
１０ ３０
１１ ３１ Cancel

１２ ３２
１３ ３３
１４ ＡＢＣ００４ ３４

Free number Details OK

2 Change the display contents using Group, Search, Sort, Select page function,
Display All, so that the desired message name is displayed.

3 Select the message name and press the OK .

The selected message is called and the display returns to the Print description screen.

●Call and print saved messages 4-12

 4.4 Overwrite messages to be printed
(1) Overview
● Overwrites the current message by the same name.
● If the message is saved using the overwrite message function when updating the count value, the same
print description can be selected later.
● Message name cannot be changed.

See "4.6 Save created messages" for message save.

(2) Operation
(a) New HMI

1 Press menu SAVE .

The Save screen will be displayed.

Current massage name This button is activated when Current message name is displayed.

Save × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

2
ABC123 1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

OVERWRITE NEW
MESSAGE MESSAGE

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

OVERWRITE MESSAGE NEW MESSAGE

2 Press OVERWRITE MESSAGE .

Save is performed. When save is completed, it will return to the Print description screen (HOME).

4-13 ●Overwrite messages to be printed

(b) Previous HMI
The Print description screen is displayed.

Print description [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0
Message name[ ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋

Twin

1 2

Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink

Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
Print count １０００(prints) Print count
reset
Ink pressure 2 : ０．２６０
Ink pressure 1 : ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

message Menu
message message parameters management

Overwrite message

1 Press Overwrite message .

"Same Print Data Found" message is displayed.

2 Press Enter .
Save is performed.

●Overwrite messages to be printed 4-14

 4.5 Edit messages different from the current message
1(1) Overview
● Edits and saves a specific saved message or a new message.
● Since a message different from the current message (message currently being printed) is edited, the
contents currently being printed are not affected.
● When the Back button is pressed at the Edit message screen or other edit screen, the display returns to the
Select message screen. Before pressing the Back button, always save the created and edited message.
If returned to the Select message screen without saving the message, the edited message is lost.
● The desired message can be efficiently found by changing the display contents of the message name list.
● A print image of the registered print data can be checked.

Method of changing the message name list display

Item Contents
● Press the group No. button.
● Only the messages belonging to the selected group are displayed.
Group
● When "0:All message names" is selected, the message names of all
the groups are displayed.
Previous display, next display ● Switches the message name list display screen.
Select page ● Selects the message name list page.
● The sort order can be switched by pressing the heading part of the
Sort
message name list display.
● The first several characters of a message name are input and only the
message names beginning with those characters are displayed.
Search
● If the Search conditions are not input, all the message names in that
group are displayed.
● Defines Group No. as "00" and the search condition as space, then
Display All
displays message name list.
● Details displays the update date/time, Style, and group No., as well
Details, Simple list as the No. and message name.
● Simple list displays the No. and message name.
● By pressing Free number , all the registered numbers will be
displayed.
● Nicknames will be sorted and displayed in ascending sequence of
Free number
Registration numbers.
● Search by Group No. or Search condition input or Display all is
NOT available.
● A print image of the registered print data can be checked by
Preview Preview .
● The print contents currently being printed are not affected.

●Style displayed in the Details mode shows the type of print format.
Types of Style
Type of style Meaning
Individual Individual setup of fixed layout.
Overall Overall setup of fixed layout
Free Set up of free layout.

90° Setup of Right-angled printing

4-15 ●Edit messages different from the current message
(2) Operation

1 Press the Create/Edit message on the Print description screen.

1 The Create/Edit message screen is displayed.
Group No. Sort

Select message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name Previous display ,
Search conditions １ ＡＢＣ００１ １５ Ｄ
Next display
input ２ ＡＢＣ００２ ２１ ＬＭＮ３０
３ ＡＢＣ００３ ２２ ＬＭＮ４０ Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp. Select page
４ ＬＭＮ１０ ２３ ＬＭＮ５０ Select page
５ ＬＭＮ２０ ２４ ＬＭＮ６０ 1/3
１０ ＡＢＣ００４ ３０ Ｅ０１
１１ ＡＢＣ００５ ３１ Ｅ０２ Cancel
１２ Ａ０１ ３２ Ｅ０３
１３ Ｂ ３３ Ｅ０４ Display All
１４ Ｃ ３４ Ｅ０５ Display
All

Create
new message
Free number Details OK OK

Free number Details or Simple list

2 Change the display contents using Group, Search, Sort, Select page function,
Display All, so that the desired message name is displayed.

3 Select the message name and press the OK .

To create a new message, press the Create new message .
The change message screen is displayed.

●Edit messages different from the current message 4-16

 4.6 Save created messages
(1) Overview
● Saves created messages.
● A save No. is automatically assigned.
● The same message name cannot be assigned.
● Saving to a selected group is possible.
● Free spaces are displayed (ONLY Previews HMI screen).

Item Contents
Free space Proportional of save area which is vacant.

● If the number of input characters is small, the capacity necessary to save the message decreases. A lot of
small capacity messages can be saved. When there are many large capacity messages, the number of
messages which can be saved decreases.

*1) Maximum message save count

Conditions example Message save count
Characters 70 chars 2,000 messages
Characters 20 chars, calendar 1, count 1 Approx. 2,000 messages
Characters 240 chars Approx. 900 messages
Characters 240 chars, calendar 8, count 8 Approx. 400 messages

4-17 ●Save created messages

(2) Operation
(a) New HMI
1 Press menu SAVE .
The Save screen will be displayed.

Current massage name This button is activated when Current message name is displayed.

Save × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

2
ABC123 1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

OVERWRITE NEW
MESSAGE MESSAGE

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

OVERWRITE MESSAGE NEW MESSAGE

2 Press NEW MESSAGE .

The keyboard is displayed.
Current massage name Message name being input.
Save × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45
ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Cursor position
(6/500)
ABC１２３・ (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 × Delete Insert

Q W E R T Y U I O P copy Paste

#+= A S D F G H J K L Enter

Aa Z X C V B N M Space

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

ホーム

Enter

3 Input the message name and press the Enter Enter .

Save is performed. When save is completed, it will return to the Print description screen (HOME).

●Save created messages 4-18

 (b) Previous HMI
The Change message screen is displayed.

Change message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋
HOME

Print Edit Print Various

Twin
format message spec. print setup
<Format Setup>
Individual
setup
:Multiple print formats can be mixed.

Overall :Character size and inter-character space set

setup
value are matched at all lines.
Only 1 column can be input. Save and Back
Free layout :An arbitrary position can be set for each print Save and Back
item.

Right angle
:Rotate characters 90 degrees to print.
print Back

1 Press the Save and Back .

The Save message screen is displayed.

Save message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Save message as (name) ＡＢＣ００１

Manual Startup
Group No. ０１ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１

HOME
Free space 20%

Cancel

Simple list
OK
OK

4-19 ●Save created messages

2 Press Message name.
A keyboard is displayed.

Save message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Save message as (name) ＡＢＣ００１

Manual Startup
Group No. ０１ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１
HOME
Free space 20 %

← ＡＢＣ００１ →

123… ABC… etc. ▽

Sign Delete Back space

Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ Dupli-
cate
Paste

Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ Ent
Enter

Space Cancel
Change Change

Enter

3 Input the message name and press the Enter Enter .

4 Press the OK .
The message is saved.

●Save created messages 4-20

 4.7 Set the print format(Fixed layout)
4.7.1 Select the print items to be edited
(1) Selecting one print item
● Sets and changes the print format including the character size for the print item to be edited.
● There are 3 methods of selecting the print item to be edited.
Methods of selecting the print item to be edited
Type Features
Directly touching the print item The touched item becomes the editing objective.
The topmost line of the previous column or the next column
Previous column, next column
becomes the editing objective
The print item of the specified line in the editing objective column
Select line
becomes the editing objective.

The editing objective can be changed by

directly touching a print item.
Print format [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

The colored print Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

item is the editing

Manual Startup
objective.
− ＋
Apply HOME
Previous column
Column 101
0：AB
N2
→
Next column
Select Line 1st line

Bold 1 （times 1∼9）

Twin
Bar code none
Edit
The selected line message
in the editing Inter-char. space Print
objective column (MAX 14 ) 00 Line 0 spec.
spacing
becomes the Dot matrix 18x24 (MAX 0 ) Adjustment
editing objective char. cond.

by Select line
⋮

button. 1 line 2 lines Delete Col. Insert Col. Add Col. To Overall Back

Next col.

Next column

Prev.col.

1st line 2nd line Previous 1st line 2nd line

column
First line Second line First line Second line

How to change the print item to be edited

4-21 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

(2) Selecting all print items
● All the print items become the editing objective.
● When placed into the Overall mode, first matching to the format information of the 1st line is
performed.
● Overall mode is cancelled after closing the Change message screen.

Print format [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋
Apply HOME

Column 101
0：AB
N2
→

Select Line 1st line

Bold 1 （times 1∼9）

Twin
Bar code none
Edit
message
Inter-char. space Print
(MAX 14 ) 00 Line 0 spec.
spacing
Dot matrix 18x24 (MAX 0 ) Adjustment
char. cond.
⋮

1 line 2 lines Delete Col. Insert Col. Add Col. To Overall Back

To Overall

To Overall

Overall

One print item becomes All the print items become

the editing objective. To Overall
the editing objective.
Overall (To cancel)

How to change the print item to be edited

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-22

 4.7.2 Set the number of print lines
(1) Function
● Sets the number of lines of the selected column.
● The number of lines which can be set is "1 to 8".
Maximum line count
Model type Maximum line count
UX-D8 8 lines

● When the number of vertical dots exceeds the maximum number of dots, the characters size becomes
5×8(5×7).

Print format [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

The colored print Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

item is the editing

objective. Manual Startup
− ＋
Apply HOME

Column 101
0：AB
N2
→

Select Line 1st line

Bold 1 （times 1∼9）

Twin
Bar code none
Edit
message
Inter-char. space Print
(MAX 14 ) 00 Line 0 spec.
spacing
Dot matrix 18x24 (MAX 0 ) Adjustment
char. cond.
⋮

1 line 2 lines Delete Col. Insert Col. Add Col. To Overall Back

1 line 2 lines

1 line

1 line

1 lines
⋮

2 lines

Example for changing the number of lines of the editing objective column

4-23 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

4.7.3 Add and delete print items
(1) Function
● Deletes, inserts, and adds print items in column units.
Methods of adding and deleting print items
Type Features
Delete column Deletes all the print items of the editing objective column.
Insert column Adds a column directly before the editing objective column.
Add column Adds a column at the end.

Print format [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

The colored column is Manual Startup

the editing objective. − ＋
Apply HOME

Column 101
0：AB
N2
→

Select Line 1st line

Bold 1 （times 1∼9）

Twin
Bar code none
Edit
message
Inter-char. space Print
(MAX 14 ) 02 Line 0 spec.
spacing
Dot matrix 18x24 (MAX 0 ) Adjustment
char. cond.
⋮

1 line 2 lines Delete Col. Insert Col. Add Col. To Overall Back

Delete Column Insert Column Add Column

Delete C. Insert C. Add Col.

Delete Insert Add column

column column

Example of deleting, inserting, and adding print items in column units

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-24

 4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters
(1) Function
● Sets the line spacing, dot matrix, inter-character space, bold font, and bar code.

Print format [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
The colored print item
is the editing objective. Manual Startup
− ＋
Apply HOME

Column 101
0：A B
N2
→

Bold Select Line 1st line

Bold 1 （times 1∼9）

Twin
Bar code none
Inter-character space Edit
message
Inter-char. space Print
(MAX 14 ) 02
Dot matrix Line
spacing
0 spec.
Dot matrix 18x24 (MAX 0 ) Adjustment
char. cond.
⋮

1 line 2 lines Delete Col. Insert Col. Add Col. To Overall Back

Line spacing Adjustment char. cond.

1 Bold
● Sets the character to bold.
● The magnification which can be set is “1 to 9”.

2 Line spacing
● Adjust the spacing with the line above.
● Set for each column.
● Can be set up to a maximum of 4 dots.
Model type Maximum line spacing
UX-D8 4 dots

3 Dot matrix
● Sets the character size.
Settable sizes (horizontal dots × vertical dots)
4×5, 5×5, 5×8(5×7), 9×8(9×7), 7×10,
10×12, 11×11, 12×16, 18×24, 24×32,
30×40, 36×48, 48×64
5×3 (chimney), 5×5 (chimney), 7×5(chimney)

4-25 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

● See "6.1 Set the user environment" for 5×8, 5×7 and 9×8, 9×7 switching. However, for special
characters, accent characters, Russian characters, Arabic numbers, and Arabic letters, select character
size with vertical 8 dots since the pattern is designed with vertical 8 dots.
● Character sizes 30×40, 36×48 and 48×64 can be set with "Free layout" of <Format setup>.
30×40, 36×48 and 48×64 will be shown on screen when Nozzle 2 is selected. By selecting these
character sizes, the composite characters can be easily created by using both nozzles.
The functions which are not supported for these character sizes are:
Calendar function, Count function, User pattern, Barcode and Editing standard character pattern.
Please refer to Technical Manual, " ● Adjustment Procedures for "Composite Characters" " for print
adjustment procedures.
● The kinds of characters which can be input are defined for each character size. A space is entered when
there is no corresponding character for the changed character size.
Kinds of characters which can be input by character size
5×8 9×8 Chimney Chimney Chimney
Character kind 4×5 5×5 7×10 10×12 11×11 12×16 18×24 24×32 30×40 36×48 48×64
(5×7) (9×7) 5×3 5×5 7×5
Chinese character × × × × × × ○ ○ × × × × × × ×
Kana × × ○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × × × × × ×
Alphabet letters,
numeric, symbols ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Space ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
User pattern ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × ○ ○ ○
Punct. character ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ×
Dedicated character × × ○ × ○ × × × × × × × × × × ×
Accent character × × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×
Greek character × × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×
Russian character × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × ○ ○
Arabic numeric × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×
Arabic letter × × ○ × × ○ × ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×

● Communication is unsupported for Russian characters of 5×5, 5×5(chimney) and 7×5(chimney).

● Multiple character sizes can be freely combined. However, there is a limit on the total number of vertical
dots.

Model type Total vertical dots limit

UX-D8 32 dots
Character sizes having 8 or less vertical dots are calculated as 8 dots.

● Chimney characters consist of characters which can be written vertically.

Line direction

Chimney printing example

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-26

 4 Inter-character space
● Sets the spacing between character and character.

English A English B

Vertical 8 dots

Horizontal 5 dots Inter-character space Character size: 5×8

Inter-character space: 2 dots

Relationship between character and inter-character space

User pattern (save character) English A

Vertical 8 dots

Character size: 5×8

Horizontal 5 dots Inter-character space
Inter-character space: 5 dots

Relationship between user pattern and inter-character space

● For user pattern (user pattern), patterns can be designed at the inter-character space part.
● For special characters also, a pattern can be designed at the inter-character space. Set an inter-character
space the same as the values shown in the table below.

Inter-character space minimum set value

5×8 9×8
Character kind 5×5 7×10 10×12 11×11 12×16 18×24 24×32 30×40 36×48 48×64
(5×7) (9×7)
Chinese character - - - - - 0 4 6 - - - -
Kana - 0 - 0 2 - 4 6 - - - -
Dedicated character - 1 - 1 - - - - - - - -
Arabic numeric 0 2 0 0 0 - 2 2 2 - - -
Arabic letter - 2 - - 0 - 2 2 2 - - -

4-27 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

 Character size inter-character space

1 Number of horizontal 2 Inter-character space

Character size Maximum inter-character
which can be input by
(horizontal × vertical) dots of character size which can be set
user pattern creation
4×5 4 4 28
5×5 5 3 27
5×8(5×7) 5 3 27
9×8(9×7) 9 7 23
7×10 7 1 25
10×12 10 6 22
11×11 11 5 21
12×16 12 4 20
18×24 18 6 14
24×32 24 8 8
30×40 40 - 18
36×48 48 - 12
48×64 64 - 16
5×3 chimney 5 0 27
5×5 chimney 5 0 27
7×5 chimney 7 0 25

● Inter-character space can be set in character units using the Adjustment char. cond. .
● Select the character column where the inter-character space will be set using Start and End , input the
inter-character space set value, and press the OK .

Adjust Inter-character space [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋
Apply HOME

Select line 1st line

1 10 20
《 ← ＡＢＣ１２３・ → 》 Nozzle 1

Select area Start End Cancel Set value [ ００ ]

Inter-char. space 00
Inter-char. space Adjust Inter-character space OK

Back
Back

Start End OK

● When the inter-character space of the print format screen changed, the value set in character units
changes to the same value.
● The display value of the inter-character space of the print format screen displays the inter-character
space of the first character.

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-28

 4.7.5 Print a bar code
(1) Kinds of bar codes
● Different kinds of bar codes can be set for each print item.
Kinds of bar codes
Bar code Kinds of characters which can be input Remarks
0 to 9 A to Z Space
Code 39
+ - (minus) / . (period) $ %
ITF 0 to 99 Input of two-digit numbers
0 to 9
NW-7
+ - (minus) / . (period) : (colon) $
EAN-13 0 to 9
EAN-13 Add-On 5 0 to 9
EAN-8 0 to 9
UPC-A 0 to 9
UPC-E 0 to 9
Code 128 0 to 9 A to Z a to z Space Input numeric of two-digit
(code set B) FNC1 Code B Code C Symbols numbers
Code 128
0 to 9 FNC1 Code B Code C
(code set C)
Data matrix 0 to 9 A to Z a to z Space
(DM) FNC1 Symbols
QR code, Micro QR Same as above.
Limited, Omnidirectional and
GS1 DataBar 0 to 9
Stacked

● When a bar code of the same kind was set at adjacent print items, only the continuous series bar code is
assumed. However, fixed length bar codes such as EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A, UPC-E,
EAN-13 Add-On 5 and GS1 DataBar become independent bar codes.
● For multiple settings, provide a print item for which a bar code is not set between the print items with a
bar code set.
● Up to a maximum of 4 DM (Data Matrix), code 128, QR code, Micro QR and GS1 DataBar can be set for
each nozzle respectively.
QR code and Micro QR can be collectively set up to 4 for each nozzle.
● Since the number of horizontal dots is uniquely determined for bar codes, an inter-character space cannot
be set.

● A bar code can be set even for print items with a calendar and count set. However, when calendar
substitution, zero suppression, or an invalid character is set, for the bar code setting, the relevant
character is deleted.
● Neither the calendar nor the count set can be set to the country code.
● When code set C of code 128 was set when the English alphabet is set for the count upper limit, the
relevant character is deleted.
● Since start and stop codes are automatically generated, input as print description is unnecessary.
● A barcode with the identification numbers can be set in 1 line or 2 lines setting.
When in 2 lines setting, the barcode with the identification numbers can only be set to either upper or
lower line.
If the barcode is set to the upper line, it cannot be set to the lower line or vice versa.
● When "Barcode with Human Readable Interpretation" is used and when "Format setup" is set to "Free
layout", Barcode and Human Readable Interpretation will be printed nozzle by nozzle independently.
But note that "EAN-13 and five-digit add-on" and "GS1 DataBar Stacked" are NOT supported.
● For GS1 DataBar, neither the calendar nor the count can be set to 1st, 2nd and 3rd digit.

See the Technical Manual "9. APPENDIX" for details.

4-29 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout)

 (2) Examples
1 Example of EAN-13

Print format [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup

Sets barcode type. − ＋

HOME

Column 1

Sets "Disable" or
character size of Select Line 1st line
Sets an EAN Prefix
identification code 1 （times
code when EAN-13,
Bold 1-9）
when EAN-13, Twin
EAN-8 or EAN-13
49
EAN-8, UPC-A,
Bar code EAN-13 EAN Prefix
Add-On 5 is selected
Edit
UPC-E, EAN-13 EAN readable code 5x5
message
(the EAN Prefix code
Add-On 5 or GS1 Inter-char. space Print
can also be set at the
DataBar is (MAX 0 ) 00 Line 0 spec. Edit message screen
(See "4.15.3 Set
spacing
selected. Dot matrix 18x24 (MAX 0 ) Adjustment
(When character char. cond. various printing".)).
size is 12 x 16 or
⋮

larger.) 1 line 2 lines Delete Col. Insert Col. Add Col. To Overall Back

2 Example of Data Matrix

Print format [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋
Apply
Sets barcode type. HOME

Column 101
0：A B
N2
→
1st line
Displays maximum
Select Line
1 （times
input digits for DM Bold 1-9）
Twin
(Data Matrix) Bar code DM(16x16)
Max digits numeric: 24 ,alphameric: 12- 23 Edit
Selectable matrix message

size depends Inter-char. space

(MAX 4 ) 00 Line 0
Print
spec.
on the character spacing
12x16 Adjustment
size.
Dot matrix (MAX 0 )
char. cond.
⋮

1 line 2 lines Delete Col. Insert Col. Add Col. To Overall Back

3 Example of Human readable Interpretation nozzle by nozzle (Free layout)

Print format [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

《 》
Manual Startup
− ＋
The barcode setup
Apply
of nozzle 2 will be
HOME
Prev. Next
automatically set
Sets barcode type. item item
0：A B
Column 1 to that of nozzle 1.
N1
→
When Dot matrix of Usage range
00000 00200 Hor. 78
nozzle 1 is set to 5x5 Vert. 16
or 5x7, Barcode and Bold 1 (times 1∼9)
Human Readable Bar code EAN-13 １1
Interpretation can be Disable Edit
EAN readable code 5x7(Nozzle1)
set nozzle by nozzle 5x5(Nozzle2) message
01
independently. Inter-char. space 5x7(Nozzle2) Print
spec.
But please note that
(MAX 0)
5x5(Nozzle1)
12x16 Twin Adjustment
this can be supported Dot matrix 5x7(Nozzle1) Cancel
char. cond.
only when the print
Overall Individual
item for nozzle 2 is item move item move
Delete item Insert item
Back
selected.

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-30

 4.8 Set the print format (Free layout)
4.8.1 Select the print items to be edited
● Set and change the print format including the character size for the print item to be edited.
● There are 2 methods of selecting the print item to be edited.

Methods of selecting the print item to be edited

Type Features
Directly touching the print item The touched item becomes the editing objective.
Previous item, next item The previous item or the next item becomes the editing objective.

The editing objective can be changed by

directly touching a print item.

Print format [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
The colored print Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Item is the editing
《 》
objective. Manual Startup

− ＋
Apply HOME
Previous item
Column 101
0：A B
N2
→
Usage range Next item
00000 00200 Hor. 78
Vert. 16
Bold 1 (times 1∼9)
Display the vertical
Bar code none printing range and
Edit
message horizontal printing
Inter-char. space 01 Print range.
(MAX 0) spec.
Dot matrix 12x16 Twin Adjustment
char. cond.

Overall Individual
Delete item Insert item
item move item move Back

4-31 ●Set the print format (Free layout)

 4.8.2 Set the print items to be edited
(1) Function
● Set the "horizontal (X) coordinate" and "vertical (Y) coordinate" of the selected item at the bottom-left.
● The total number of vertical dots and limit of the coordinate are as follows;
Total vertical dots and limit of coordinate
Horizontal (X)
Model type Total vertical dots Vertical (Y) coordinate
coordinate
UX-D8 32 dots 0 to 31999 0 to 31

Display the upper limit line of the

Horizontal (X) coord. = 0 Horizontal (X) coord. = 0 vertical dots.
Vertical (Y) coord. = 0 Vertical (Y) coord. = 4 (The line position is changed by the
display magnification)

Print format [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

《 》
Manual Startup

− ＋
Apply HOME

Column 101
0：A B
N2
→
Usage range
00000 00200 Hor. 78
Vert. 16
Bold 1 (times 1∼9)
Bar code none
Edit
message
Inter-char. space 01 Print
(MAX 0) spec.
Dot matrix 12x16 Twin Adjustment
char. cond.

Display the lower limit Overall Individual

Delete item Insert item
item move item move Back
line of the vertical dots.
(The line position is
changed by the Display the Horizontal (X)
display magnification) coordinate

●Set the print format (Free layout) 4-32

 (2) Set the coordinate of one print item
● Set and change the "horizontal (X) coordinate" and "vertical (Y) coordinate" of the print item to be edited,
at the bottom-left.
● Press Individual item move, and set the coordinate of the print item to be edited.
● There are 3 methods of setting the horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate.
● The horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate cannot be set over the range of [ Table of (1) ].
Methods of setting the horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate
Type Features
The print item to be edited can be moved by directly touching the
Directly touching the screen
screen within the limit of vertical dots.
The print item to be edited can be moved by setting the value of
Set the value of the coordinate the "horizontal (X) coordinate" and "vertical (Y) coordinate" on
the screen.
The print item to be edited can be moved dot by dot one by means
Set the position by cursor button
of ↑ ↓ ← → buttons.

The editing objective can be moved by

directly touching the screen.

Print format [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

《 》
Manual Startup
The horizontal (X) − ＋
coordinate and Apply HOME

vertical (Y) coordinate Column 101

0：A B
of editing objective can N2
→
be moved by directly Usage range
Hor. 78
00000 00200
touching the screen. Vert. 16
Bold 1 (times
Item position select 1∼9)
Item move with button or none
Bar code touch on screen.
↑ Edit
Horizontal (X) 00001
message
Vertical (Y)
Inter-char. 00 01
space ← → Print
(MAX 0) spec.
OK12x16 ↓
Dot matrix Cancel Adjustment
char. cond.

Overall Individual
Delete item Insert item
item move item move Back

Cursor button
Individual item move
Press the Cancel if canceling the
Press the OK if the print item
moving the coord..
has been moved.

4-33 ●Set the print format (Free layout)

(3) Set the coordinate of all print items
● All print items can be moved collectively.
● Press Overall item move , and move all items.
● All print items can be moved dot by dot by means of ↑ ↓ ← → buttons.
● The horizontal (X) coordinate and vertical (Y) coordinate cannot be set over the range of Table of item (1).

Print format [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

《 》
Manual Startup

− ＋
Apply HOME

Column 101
0：A B
N2
→
Usage range
00000 00200 Hor. 78
Vert. 16
Bold 1 (times
Item position select 1∼9)
Item move with button. none
↑
Bar code
Edit
message
Inter-char. space 01 ← →
Print
(MAX 0) spec.
OK ↓
Dot matrix 12x16 Cancel Adjustment
char. cond.

Overall Individual
Delete item Insert item
item move item move Back

Cursor button
Overall item move Press the OK if the print Press the Cancel if canceling the
item has been moved.. moving the coord..

●Set the print format (Free layout) 4-34

 4.8.3 Add and delete print items
(1) Function
● Add or delete print items one by one.
Methods of adding and deleting print items
Type Features
Insert item Add the print item at the selected position.
Delete item Delete the print item to be edited
● Press Insert item and touch the print layout screen, then the print item (character size is 5×7 or 5×8)
will be created.
When the print item is created, if the horizontal (X) coordinate or vertical (Y) coordinate is over the
limit of range of the coordinate, the horizontal (X) coordinate or vertical (Y) coordinate will be adjusted
automatically.
● When there is only one print item, if Delete item is pressed and the print item is deleted, a print item
(character size is 5×7 or 5×8) will be created at the horizontal (X) coordinate = 0, vertical (Y) coordinate
=0.

A print item can be created by directly touching the print layout screen.

Print format [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

《 》
Manual Startup

− ＋
Apply HOME

0：A B
N2
→
Usage range
00000 00200 Hor. 78
Vert. 16
Bold 1 (times
Item position select 1∼9)
Touch on screen at insertnone
Bar code position.
The touch position is left-bottom coordinate of item. Edit
message
Inter-char. space 01 Print
(MAX 0) spec.
Dot matrix 12x16 Cancel Adjustment
char. cond.

Overall Individual
Delete item Insert item
item move item move Back

A print item (character size is

5×7 or 5×8) will be created. Insert item

Print format [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

《 》
Manual Startup

− ＋
Apply HOME

Column 102
0：A B
N2
→
Usage range
00000 00200 Hor. 156
Vert. 27
Bold Item position 1 (times
select 1∼9)
Item move with button ornone
touch on screen.
Bar code ↑
Horizontal (X) 00151 Edit
message
Vertical (Y)
Inter-char. 2001
space ← →
Print
(MAX 0) spec.
OK ↓
Dot matrix 12x16 Cancel Adjustment
char. cond.

Overall Individual
Delete item Insert item
item move item move Back

The method of setting the horizontal (X) coordinate and

vertical (Y) coordinate is as same as "Individual item move".
4-35 ●Set the print format (Free layout)
4.8.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters
● Set the dot matrix, inter-character space, bold font, and bar code.
● The methods of setting is the same as fixed layout. See "4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and
other parameters" for details.
● The bottom-left coordinate of the selected print item is first fixed and adjust as follows:.
When changing the dot matrix, inter-character space, etc…, the top-right coordinate of the print item can be
over the limit of coordinate.

Char. size : 12×16 Char. size : 12×16

Bold font : ×1 Bold font : ×2

Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31961 Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31922

Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31999

Vertical (Y) coordinate=31

Char. size :
12×16 Char. size :
18×24

Vertical (Y) coordinate=16 Vertical (Y) coordinate=8

●Set the print format (Free layout) 4-36

 4.8.5 Print a bar code
● Set bar code for free layout.
● Basic method of the setting bar code is the same as the method for the fixed layout. See the "4.7.5 Print a bar
code" for details.
● There are some restrictions for setting the bar code for free layout. The restrictions are described as follows;
The restrictions of the setting bar code for free layout
Bar code Restriction
Data Matrix (DM) Up to maximum of 1 DM, per one message.
QR code and Micro QR can be collectively set up to 1,
QR code and Micro QR
per one message.
GS1 DataBar Up to maximum of 1 GS1 DataBar, per one message.
Code 128 Up to maximum of 1 Code 128, per one message.

In case that a bar code of the same Two of the bar code are not handled a series of barcode.
kind was Set at adjacent print items Each bar code is handled as an independent bar codes.

● When changing the bar code, the top-right coordinate of the print item can go over the limit of coordinate.
Should the top-right of the print item go beyond the limit of horizontal (X) coordinate, it will be
automatically adjusted to horizontal (X) coordinate=31999.

Char. size : 12×16 Char. size : 12×16

Bar code : none Bar code : Code39

Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31961 Horizontal (X) coordinate = 31920

horizontal (X) coordinate = 31999

4.8.6 Cautions for printing overlapped some print items

● If multiple numbers of print items are overlapped, the printing may be aborted depending on the number of
print items or characters because it requires time to create the print data while printing is in process.
In this case, the alarm "Free Layout Printing Disabled" occurs.
● Please first conduct print test at the free layout setting, and if the alarm "Free Layout Printing Disabled"
occurs, delete some print items which are overlapped, or decrease the value of ink drop use setting.

4-37 ●Set the print format (Free layout)

4.9 Set the print format (Right-angled printing)
4.9.1 Select the print items to be edited
(1) Function
● When Right-angled printing is set, all print items will always be the editing objects (Overall setup).
● When editing the message on each screen, the message preview is not Right-angled but displayed
normally.
● Please refer to Technical Manual, "9. Appendix ● Adjustment Procedures for "Composite Characters"
for print adjustment procedures.

Print format [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋
HOME

0：A B
→

Bold 1 （times 1∼9）

Twin
Bar code none
Edit
message
Inter-char. space Print
(MAX 4 ) 00 Line 0 spec.
spacing
Dot matrix 7x5(Chimney) (MAX 4 )
⋮

1 line 2 lines 3 lines 4 lines Delete Col. Back

4.9.2 Set the number of print lines

(1) Function
● Sets the number of lines of the selected column.
● The number of lines which can be set is "1 to 4".

Print format [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
4 line
− ＋
3 line Apply HOME

2 line
0：A B
1 line →

Bold 1 （times 1∼9）

Twin
Bar code none
Edit
message
Inter-char. space Print
(MAX 2 ) 00 Line 0 spec.
spacing
Dot matrix 7x5(Chimney) (MAX 4 )
⋮

1 line 2 lines 3 lines 4 lines Delete Col. Back

● Set the print format (Right-angled printing) 4-38

 4.9.3 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters
(1) Function
● Sets the line spacing, dot matrix, inter-character space.
● When Right-angled printing is set, Dot matrix, Inter-char. space and Line spacing are set
commonly among the lines (print items).
● When Right-angled printing is set, Bold is "1" fixed.
● Right-angled printing cannot set Barcode.

Print format [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋
HOME

0：A B
→

Bold 1 （times 1∼9）

Twin
Bar code none
Edit
message
Inter-char. space Print
(MAX 4 ) 00 Line 0 spec.
spacing
Dot matrix 7x5(Chimney) (MAX 4 )
⋮

1 line 2 lines 3 lines 4 lines Delete Col. Back

① Line spacing
● Can be set up to a maximum of 4 dots.
Model type Maximum line spacing
UX-D8 4 dots

② Dot matrix
● Sets the character size.
● The kinds of characters which can be input are the same as fixed layout. However Logo is able to be
set only in fixed size. See the "4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters" for
details.

Settable sizes for Right-angled printing (horizontal dots × vertical dots)

5×5 (chimney), 7×5(chimney)

③ Inter-character space
● When Right-angled printing is set, Inter-char. space which can be set will change according to the
number of characters which are input in one line.
● Inter-character space cannot be set in character units.
● Inter-character space should be set to 0 - 2 for better printing quality.
Settable Inter-character space for Right-angled printing
Max number of characters per line Value
1-8 characters / line 0 to 4
9-12 characters / line 0 to 2

4-39 ● Set the print format (Right-angled printing)

4.10 Print characters
Lines and Message length (Characters)
Model type 1 line 2 lines 3 lines 4 lines
UX-D8 500 char. 250 char. 166 char. 125 char.

● The number of digits for each column is limited to 500 characters per nozzle.
● When Right-angled printing is set, the print characters can be set up to 12 characters/line,
max. 48 characters/4 lines.

4.10.1 Print fixed characters

(1) Function
● Inputs the characters to be printed.
● The kinds of characters which can be input are defined for each character size. Moreover, there is an
appropriate inter-character space depending on the kind of character. (See "4.7.4 Set dot matrix,
inter-character space, and other parameters".)

● There is an "Insert" mode and an "Overwrite" mode when inputting.

● "Duplicate" by selecting the start and end of the character string and "Paste" at an arbitrary position are
possible.

● The characters which can be set as dedicated characters are shown below.
For dedicated characters, single words are handled collectively at input and deletion.

Ex. Dedicated character (Simple Chinese)

● Inputting an Arabic character will move the cursor to the left.

● Use the Insert mode to input Arabic characters.
● Alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input on the Edit screen (New HMI).
If the characters other than Alphanumeric characters or symbols are needed, use Edit message screen
(Previous HMI).

●Print characters 4-40

 (2) Operation
(a) New HMI
1 Press menu EDIT .
The Edit screen will be displayed.

2 Touch the print item which is to be the objective of message editing.

The print description of the selected print item is displayed at the print description edit area.

3 Touch the position at which input in the print description edit area is to begin
and move the cursor.
The cursor button or the scroll button may also be pressed.
The cursor is displayed at the selected position

4 Press the input mode button or the shift button.

The kind of keyboard is changed
Print contents edit area
Save × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45
ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Left : Characters counted

Right : Max characters
Print layout
Cursor position at
(6/500)
ABC１２３・ (1) "Overwrite" mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 × Delete Insert
Input mode : Insert
Numeric, Q W E R T Y U I O P copy Paste
Left scroll at Print
Symbols #+= A S D F G H J K L Enter contents edit area
Aa Z X C V B N M Space
Right scroll at Print
Shift
contents edit area
HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN
ホーム

Enter
By pressing Insert , the screen shown below will be displayed.
Cursor position at
"Insert" mode
(6/500)
ABC・ (0/1) Left : Left of cursor
Right : Right of cursor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 × Delete Insert

Q W E R T Y U I O P copy Paste Back space

Cursor
#+= A S D F G H J K L Enter

Aa Z X C V B N M Space

By pressing Input mode , the screen shown below will be displayed.

(6/500)
ABC・
Input mode : (0/1)
Delete
Numeric, 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 × Delete Insert
Copy
Alphabet letters ＋ − × / ( ) . : , ! copy Paste
Paste
ABC ″ # $ % & ¥ [ ] Enter
Space
■ = ? < > ; * _ Space

Enter
5 Input the characters and press the Enter .
The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed at the print layout.
4-41 ●Print characters
(b) Previous HMI
The Edit message screen is displayed. (See "3.3.1 Operating Scheme".)

1 Touch the print item which is to be the objective of message editing.

Prev. Item and Next Item may also be pressed.
The print description of the selected print item is displayed at the print description edit area.

2 Touch the position at which input in the print description edit area is to begin
and move the cursor.
The cursor button may also be pressed.
The cursor is displayed at the selected position.

3 Press the input mode button.

The kind of keyboard is changed.

Print contents edit area

Next item

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Print layout
Manual Startup Apply
− ＋
Apply HOME
Previous item
Print item No.
Cursor N2
0：A B
Column 101
→
Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
Scroll in the print 《 ← ＡＢＣ１２３・ → 》
description edit area
123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽
Twin
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Input mode button Dupli-
Print
group Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate Paste
spec.

Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space cond.
Change Change Back

Numeric, Symbols Alphabet letters Logo (Fixed, Free size) Punct. character,
Accent character, etc.
4 Input the characters and press the Apply Apply
.
The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed at the print layout.

●Print characters 4-42

 4.11 Use the calendar function
4.11.1 Print calendar characters
(1) Calendar characters
● When set as calendar characters, the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second are matched to the current
date/time and printed each time the calendar time is changed.
● When "clock stop" is selected for calendar time control at the Date/time setup screen, the inputted
calendar time is referenced and printed.
Kinds of calendar characters
Displays in Number of digits
Item Substitution rules Reference
"Print layout area" which can be input
Year Y 4 Yes
Month M 3 Yes
Day D 3 Yes
Hour h 2 Yes
Minute m 2 Yes
Second s 2 -
Total number of days T 3 - 4.11.1(2)
Week No. W 3 Yes 4.11.1(4)
Day of week 7 3 Yes 4.11.1(5)
Shift code E 10 - 4.12
Time count F 3 - 4.13
JAN, FEB, ----
- 3 - 4.11.1(3)
(Month 3 digits)
● When Right-angled printing is set, Only "Year", "Month", "Day", "Hour" and "Minute" are available.
● A group of calendar characters is called "Calendar block".
Maximum Calendar block count
Model type Maximum Calendar block count
UX-D8 8
(Maximum digit : 20 digits/Calendar block
*Right-angled printing can set up to 8 digits for each Nozzle.
See the "4.11.4 Cautions for printing Calendar character when using Right-angled printing" for details.)
● Calendar conditions are set for each calendar block.
● Calendar characters cannot be input at the same calendar block as shift code characters and time count
characters.
Calendar block Calendar block

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋
Apply HOME
Column 101
Calendar block is N2
0：A B Item 101
displayed in a red → Char. count
6 / 500
frame. 《 ←
1 10 20
→ 》
Y Y．MM．D D h ・

★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽

Twin
123/Sign ABCabc Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli- Paste
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate
spec.

Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space cond.
Change Change Back

4-43 ●Use the calendar function

(2) Total number of days
● Use when setting up to print the total number of days from the first of January.
● When set as total date character, it is linked to the calendar time and the print description is changed to
match the current total number of days.
● Leap year and ordinary year are shown in the table below.
● There is no zero-suppression function.
Total number of days
1/1 1/2 ---- 2/28 2/29 3/1 ---- 12/31
Ordinary year 1 2 ---- 59 - 60 ---- 365
Leap year 1 2 ---- 59 60 61 ---- 366

(3) Alphabet month 3 digits (JAN, FEB, ----)

● Use when printing the month in alphabet 3 digits representation.
● For printing in other than English, it is defined by the month 3 digits "Substitution rules" screen.
● When month 3 digits are corresponded to new substitution rules, the English representations shown below
are set beforehand.
English representation
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN
JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

(4) Week number

● Use week number when printing the week of the year.
● One week begins on Monday and ends on Sunday.
● The week including January 4 of that year shall be week one. Making the week including the first
Thursday of the year week one is also another way of saying it.
● The beginning of a year not included in week one becomes the last week of the previous year.
Example of counting week number of end and beginning of year
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Week No.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 52
December
28 29 30 31 53
1 2 3 53
January 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 2

(5) Day of the week

● Use when representing and printing the day of the week using a 1 digit character.
● One week begins on Monday and ends on Sunday.
● When the calendar characters "Day of week" are input, the numbers 1 to 7 are printed. When printing other
representations, set the appropriate substitution rules.
Calendar "Day of the week" printing example
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday
Standard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Substitution rule set
A B C D E F G
by inputting 1 digit.
Substitution rule set
MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
by inputting 3 digits

●Use the calendar function 4-44

 (6) Operation
The Edit message screen is displayed.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup

Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→
Calendar/count Char. count
1 10 20 0 / 500
《 ← ・ → 》
Twin
123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert Over- format
write
Print
Dupli-
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate Paste spec.

Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space
Change Change cond. Back

1 Press the Calendar/count .

The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window is displayed.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Calendar/count
edit window
− ＋ Manual Startup

← ・ →
Apply HOME
OK Column 101
Cancel Item 101
0：A B
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 0 / 500
《 ← ・ → 》
Calendar/count
keyboard ★◎△ Calendar Twin
123/Sign ABCabc Logo / count etc. ▽ Delete Back space
Print
Year Month Day Hour Minu- Seco- Total Week Day Over-
te days num- of Insert write format
nd ber week
Print
Shift Time
code count spec.
Password
Count ＋ − × ／ protection

（ ） . ： , Space
Back

4-45 ●Use the calendar function

2 Input the calendar characters.
The calendar characters are displayed on the calendar/count edit window.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup
OK
← ＹＹ．ＭＭ．ＤＤ・ →
Apply HOME

OK Column 101
Cancel 0：A B Item 101
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 0 / 500
《 ← ・ → 》
Twin
★◎△ Calendar
123/Sign ABCabc Logo / count etc. ▽ Delete Back space
Print
Year Month Day Hour Minu- Seco- Total Week Day Over-
te days num- of Insert write format
nd ber week
Print
Shift Time
code count spec.
Password
Count ＋ − × ／ protection

（ ） . ： , Space
Back

3 Press OK OK .
The calendar characters are displayed at the print description edit area.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Print item to input Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup

Apply HOME
Column 101
Calendar block is N2
0：A B Item 101
→
displayed in a red Char. count
1 10 20 0 / 500
frame. 《 ← Y Y．MM．D D ・ → 》

123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽

Twin
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli-
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate Paste spec.

Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space cond.
Change Change Back

●Use the calendar function 4-46

 4 Touch the print item to input.
The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed at the print layout.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup

Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← Y Y．MM．D D ・ → 》

123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽

Twin
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli-
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate Paste spec.

Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space cond.
Change Change Back

5 To input another calendar, move the cursor to the input position and press
Calendar/count .
The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window is displayed.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup

← ・ → Apply HOME
Column 101
OK 0：A B Item 101
N2 Cancel
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← Y Y．MM．D D ・ → 》
Twin
★◎△ Calendar
123/Sign ABCabc Logo / count etc. ▽ Delete Back space
Print
Year Month Day Hour Minu- Seco- Total Week Day Over- format
te nd days num- of Insert write
ber week
Print
Shift Time
code count spec.
Password
Count ＋ − × ／ protection

（ ） . ： , Space
Back

4-47 ●Use the calendar function

6 Input the calendar characters.
The calendar characters are displayed in the calendar/count edit window.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup

OK
← ｈ・ → Apply HOME
Column 101
OK 0：A B Item 101
N2 Cancel
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← Y Y．MM．D D ・ → 》
Twin
★◎△ Calendar
123/Sign ABCabc Logo / count etc. ▽ Delete Back space
Print
Year Month Day Hour Minu- Seco- Total Week Day Over- format
te nd days num- of Insert write
ber week
Print
Shift Time
code count spec.
Password
Count ＋ − × ／ protection

（ ） . ： , Space
Back

7 Press OK OK .
The calendar characters are displayed at the print description edit area.

8 Press Apply Apply

.
The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed at the print layout.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup Apply

Apply HOME
Column 101
Calendar block is 0：A B Item 101
N2
displayed in a red → Char. count
frame. 1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← Y Y．MM．D D ・ → 》

123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽

Twin
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli-
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate Paste spec.

Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space cond.
Change Change Back

Calendar character is deleted

per calendar block unit.

●Use the calendar function 4-48

 4.11.2 Print future date (offset)
(1) Offset function
● Sets the date/time by adding the offset value and the date/time of the internal clock.
● The offset values which can be set are shown in the table below.

Offset value setting range

Year 0 to 99
Month 0 to 99
Day 0 to 1999
Hour -23 to 99
Minute -59 to 99
● There are two offset methods for future date calculations that use Month and/or Year variables, "Offset
from yesterday" and "From today".
（See "4.15.3 Set various printing" for "Offset from yesterday" and "From today" setting switching.）

<Example of offset in month units (2020 is a leap year)>

Offset from yesterday From today
Calendar time Offset value Offset value
1 month 1 month + 1 day 1 month 1 month + 1 day
2019.01.28 2019.02.27 2019.02.28 2019.02.28 2019.03.01
2019.01.29 2019.02.28 2019.02.28 2019.02.28 2019.03.01
2019.01.30 2019.02.28 2019.02.28 2019.02.28 2019.03.01
2019.01.31 2019.02.28 2019.02.28 2019.02.28 2019.03.01
2019.02.01 2019.02.28 2019.03.01 2019.03.01 2019.03.02
2019.02.02 2019.03.01 2019.03.02 2019.03.02 2019.03.03

2019.02.27 2019.03.26 2019.03.27 2019.03.27 2019.03.28

2019.02.28 2019.03.27 2019.03.28 2019.03.28 2019.03.29
2019.03.01 2019.03.31 2019.04.01 2019.04.01 2019.04.02

2020.01.28 2020.02.27 2020.02.28 2020.02.28 2020.02.29

2020.01.29 2020.02.28 2020.02.29 2020.02.29 2020.03.01
2020.01.30 2020.02.29 2020.02.29 2020.02.29 2020.03.01
2020.01.31 2020.02.29 2020.02.29 2020.02.29 2020.03.01
2020.02.01 2020.02.29 2020.03.01 2020.03.01 2020.03.02
2020.02.02 2020.03.01 2020.03.02 2020.03.02 2020.03.03

2020.02.27 2020.03.26 2020.03.27 2020.03.27 2020.03.28

2020.02.28 2020.03.27 2020.03.28 2020.03.28 2020.03.29
2020.02.29 2020.03.28 2020.03.29 2020.03.29 2020.03.30
2020.03.01 2020.03.31 2020.04.01 2020.04.01 2020.04.02

<Example of year offset (2020 is a leap year)>

Offset from yesterday From today
Calendar time Offset value Offset value
1 year 4 years 1 year 4 years
2020.02.29 2021.02.28 2024.02.28 2021.02.28 2024.02.29

4-49 ●Use the calendar function

 (2) Operation
Set offset of 1 month at the "YY.MM.DD" calendar block.
The Edit message screen is displayed.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup

Apply HOME
Column 101
Cursor N2
0：A B Item 101
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← Y Y．MM．D D h ・ → 》
Twin
123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Insert write format
Print
Dupli- Calendar conditions
＋ − × ／ （ ） . ： , ！ cate Paste
spec.

Cal. Password
” ＃ ＄ ％ ＆ ￥ ’ ■ [ ] cond. protection

Count
＝ ？ ＜ ＞ ； ＊ ＿ Space cond. Back

1 Press Cal. Cond. .

The Calendar conditions screen is displayed.

2 Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.

Calendar conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Calendar blocks:1/2

− ＋ Manual Startup

Objective calendar HOME

Calendar block No.
block is colored. Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 Y Y．MM．D D h ・ 》 Changes the objective
Ink
1st screen 2nd screen Substitution rules No. 01 Makeup calendar block.
Offset setting < Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >
Year ００００ Disable Enable Disable

Month ００００ Disable Enable Disable

Day ００００ Disable Enable Disable Substitution

rules
Hour ００００

Minute ００００
Back

●Use the calendar function 4-50

 3 Input "1" at offset "Month".
The character string of the print description edit area is displayed at the print layout.

Calendar conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Calendar blocks:1/2

− ＋ Manual Startup

HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 Y Y．MM．D D h ・ 》
Ink
1st screen 2nd screen Substitution rules No. 01 Makeup

< Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >
Offset 1 month Year ００００ Disable Enable Disable

Month ０００１ Disable Enable Disable

Day ００００ Disable Enable Disable Substitution

rules
Hour ００００

Minute ００００
Back

4-51 ●Use the calendar function

4.11.3 Print by substituting a different character for the date
(substitution rule)
(1) Substitution rule function
● Prints the date and time by replacing it with the selected characters.
● One substitution rule No. is selected for one calendar block.
● The substitution rule No. can be used in common for multiple calendar blocks.
Maximum Substitution rule count
Model type Maximum Substitution rule count
UX-D8 99
● Kana, alphanumeric, and user pattern can be set as substitution characters.
● The substitution character for year is 25 years from the year of the calendar time.

[Note] The substitution character for year omits the substitution character of the previous year each time one
year elapses.
At this time, the substitution character after 25 years becomes a space.
Moreover, when the current time "Year" is returned to the past, the substitution character for that
year becomes a space.

(2) Zero-suppression function

● Prints by substituting a space for "0" in the high-order digit of the calendar characters.
Also deletes the "0" and prints left-justified.
● When Right-angled printing is set, Zero-suppression is not available.

Example of zero-suppression (time 2009.01.02 03:04)

Print result
Set contents Enabled Enabled
Zero-suppression disabled
(space) (character justification)
YY.MM.DD 09.01.02 9. 1. 2 9.1.2
HH.MM 03:04 3: 4 3:4

( =space)

●Use the calendar function 4-52

 (3) Operation
Set the substitution rule for the "Hour" calendar character.
The Edit message screen is displayed.

1 Press Cal. Cond. .

The Calendar conditions screen is displayed.

2 Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.

3 Set "Hour" substitution rule to "Enable".

Calendar conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Calendar blocks:1/2

− ＋ Manual Startup
Objective calendar
block is colored. Apply HOME
Calendar block No.
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→
Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 Y Y．MM．D D h ・ 》 Changes the
Ink
1st screen 2nd screen Substitution rules No. 01 Makeup objective
Substitution rules calendar block.
< Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >
enabled Year ００００

Month ００００

Day ００００ Substitution

rules
００００
Substitution rules
Hour Disable Enable Disable
Minute ００００
Back

4 Press Substitution rules .

The Substitution rules screen is displayed.

5 Input Hour the substitution rule for "Hour".

"Hour" substitution rules
Substitution rules [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
N0.[０１] Subst. rule name[ ]

Hour
Manual Startup
00[A] 01[B] 02[C] 03[D] 04[E] 05[F]
06[G] 07[H] 08[ I ] 09[J] 10[K] 11[L] Apply
12[M] 13[N] 14[O] 15[P] 16[Q] 17[R]
18[S] 19[T] 20[U] 21[V] 22[W] 23[X]

↑
123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△ etc. ▽
Logo Delete Back space

Over- ← →
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write
↓
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ Duplicate

Space
Change Change Back

4-53 ●Use the calendar function

4.11.4 Cautions for printing Calendar character
when using Right-angled printing
● When Right-angled printing is set, Calendar character can be set up to 8 digits for each Nozzle.
● The number of printing characters for each Nozzle is determined based on the line where the largest
number of characters are input.
See the following table and set Calendar characters within 8 digits for each Nozzle.

The number of printing characters for each Nozzle in Right-angled printing

Maximum number of The number of printing characters for each Nozzle
characters/line Nozzle 1 Nozzle 2
1 1 0
2 2 0
3 3 0
4 4 0
5 4 1
6 4 2
7 4 3
8 4 4
9 5 4
10 5 5
11 6 5
12 6 6

<Example of VALID Calendar setup >

The character are divided

into 5 characters each per
Nozzle 2 column (vertical list) for
each nozzle.
Calendar characters
⑤⑥ ⑦⑧

Nozzle 1
①②③④

When characters are input When printed

⇒It can be set because Calendar characters are within 8 digits.

<Example of INVALID Calendar setup >

The character are divided

into 6 characters each per
Nozzle 2 column (vertical list) for
each nozzle.
① ②③④⑤

Calendar characters
⑥⑦ ⑧⑨

Nozzle 1

When characters are input When printed

⇒It cannot be set because Calendar characters exceed 8 digits.

●Use the calendar function 4-54

 4.12 Print shift code
(1) Overview
● Divides one day into multiple work shifts and prints a different code for each work shift.
(Example) Example of one day divided into 3 work shifts
No. Range Print result
1 0:30 to 8:14 A1
2 8:15 to 16:44 A2
3 16:45 to 0:29 A3

(See "(2) Operation" for the shift code setup procedure of this example.)

● Shift code character can be set at only one place in one message. Up to a maximum of 10 digits can be
input.
● Shift code rules are set at the Shift code setup screen.
● For work shift, the start time is specified in hour/minute units. Up to a maximum of 48 shifts can be
specified.
● One shift code rule is held for each message. To input the same shift code at another message, use the
"Duplicate" and "Paste" function. Input the shift code rules, memorize them by pressing Duplicate , and
press Paste at the Shift code setup screen of the other message.
● Shift code characters cannot be input at the same calendar block as another calendar.

4-55 ●Print shift code

(2) Operation
The Edit message screen is displayed.
Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup

HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
Calendar/count N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ＡＢＣ１２３・ → 》
Twin
123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△
Calendar etc. ▽
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Insert write format
Print
Dupli-
＋ − × ／ （ ） . ： , ！ cate Paste
spec.

Cal. Password
” ＃ ＄ ％ ＆ ￥ ’ ■ ［ ］ cond. protection

＝ ？ ＜ ＞ ； ＊ ＿ Space Count
cond. Back

1 Press Calendar/count .
The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window is displayed.

2 Press Shift code .

"EE" meaning shift code is displayed at the calendar/count edit window.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Calendar/count
edit window OK
− ＋ Manual Startup

← ＥＥ・ →
HOME
Column 101
OK 0：A B Item 101
Cancel
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ＡＢＣ１２３・ → 》
Twin
★◎△ Calendar
123/Sign ABCabc Logo / count etc. ▽ Delete Back space
Print
Year Month Day Hour Minu- Seco- Total Week Day Over- format
Shift code te nd days num- of Insert write
ber week
Print
Shift Time
code count spec.
Password
Count ＋ − × ／ protection

（ ） . ： , Space
Back

●Print shift code 4-56

 3 Press OK OK .
The calendar characters are displayed in the print contents edit area.

4 Touch the print item to input.

The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed in the print layout.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Print layout Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Print item to input − ＋ Manual Startup

HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
Calendar block is N2
→ Char. count
displayed in a red 1 10 20 6 / 500
frame. 《 ← ＥＥＢＣ１２３・ → 》
Twin
123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli-
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate Paste spec.

Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space
Change Change cond. Back

5 Press Cal. Cond. .

The Calendar conditions screen is displayed.

6 Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.

Calendar conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Calendar blocks:1/1

Manual Startup
− ＋
Calendar block No.
HOME
Column 101
Calendar block is N2
0：A B Item 101

displayed in a red → Char. count

1 10 20 6 / 500
frame. 《 ← → 》
ＥＥＢＣ１２３・ Ink
1st screen 2nd screen Makeup

< Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >
Year ００００

Month ００００ Shift code

Shift code
Day ００００

Hour ００００

Minute ００００
Back

4-57 ●Print shift code

7 Press Shift code .
The Shift code setup screen is displayed.
The last line is for addition.

Shift code setup [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45 Print contents

Start time Makeup Ink
Input time in ascending order.
1 ００ ： ００ ∼２３：５９ ００ Manual Startup

2 ００ ： ００ ∼２３：５９
HOME

Duplicate

Delete line

Insert line

Back

8 Input the start time and print contents for each shift.
When start time is input, the finish time which is 1 line above changes.
Shift code setup [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Start time Makeup Ink

Input time in ascending order.
1 ００ ： ３０ ∼０８：１４ Ａ１ Manual Startup

2 ０８ ： １５ ∼１６：４４ Ａ２
Apply HOME
3 １６ ： ４５ ∼００：２９ Ａ３
4 ００ ： ００ ∼００：００

Duplicate

Delete line

Insert line
Back
Back

When the work shifts exceeded 12 classes, switch using Prev. Dsp. Prev.Dsp.
or Next Dsp. Next Dsp.
.
Insertion or deletion can be performed in line units.

9 Press Back Back .

Returns to the Calendar conditions screen.

●Print shift code 4-58

 4.13 Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count)
(1) Overview
● The print contents are updated at a preset update internal (minutes) timing.
● When the time that becomes the standard is set one time a day, the print contents are updated to a preset
value when that time arrives.
● The time count characters can be set at only one place in one message. Up to a maximum of 3 digits can
be set.
● The time count conditions are set at the Time count conditions screen.
● Range, reset value, reset time, and renewal period can be set as conditions.
● Updating of the print contents is always increment + 1.
● One time count condition is held for each message. To input the same time count condition at another
message, use the "Duplicate" and "Paste" functions. Input the time count conditions, memorize them by
pressing Duplicate , and press Paste at the Time count conditions screen of the other message.
● The time count characters cannot be input at the same count block as another count.

(Example) Range AA to GG, renewal period 30 minutes, reset time 05:00, reset value “AA”
Time and count value
Time Value Time Value Time Value Time Value Time Value Time Value
00:00 FD 04:00 GE 08:00 AG 12:00 CA 16:00 DB 20:00 EC
00:30 FE 04:30 GF 08:30 BA 12:30 CB 16:30 DC 20:30 ED
01:00 FF 05:00 AA 09:00 BB 13:00 CC 17:00 DD 21:00 EE
01:30 FG 05:30 AB 09:30 BC 13:30 CD 17:30 DE 21:30 EF
02:00 GA 06:00 AC 10:00 BD 14:00 CE 18:00 DF 22:00 EG
02:30 GB 06:30 AD 10:30 BE 14:30 CF 18:30 DG 22:30 FA
03:00 GC 07:00 AE 11:00 BF 15:00 CG 19:00 EA 23:00 FB
03:30 GD 07:30 AF 11:30 BG 15:30 DA 19:30 EB 23:30 FC

(See "(2) Operation" for the time count conditions setup procedure of this example.)

4-59 ●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count)

(2) Operation
The Edit message screen is displayed.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋ Manual Startup

HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
Calendar/count N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ＡＢＣ１２３・ → 》
Twin
123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△
Calendar etc. ▽
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Insert write format
Print
Dupli-
＋ − × ／ （ ） . ： , ！ cate Paste
spec.

Cal. Password
” ＃ ＄ ％ ＆ ￥ ’ ■ ［ ］ cond. protection

＝ ？ ＜ ＞ ； ＊ ＿ Space Count
cond. Back

1 Press Calendar/count .
The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window are displayed.

2 Press Time count .

"FF" meaning time count is displayed at the calendar/count edit window.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Calendar/count OK
edit window − ＋ Manual Startup

← ＦＦ・ →
HOME
Column 101
OK Item 101
Cancel 0：A B
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ＡＢＣ１２３・ → 》
Twin
★◎△ Calendar
123/Sign ABCabc Logo / count etc. ▽ Delete Back space
Print
Year Month Day Hour Minu- Seco- Total Week Day Over-
Time count te nd days num- of Insert write
ber week
format
Print
Shift Time
code count spec.
Password
Count ＋ − × ／ protection

（ ） . ： , Space
Back

●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) 4-60

 3 Press OK OK .
The calendar characters are displayed at the print contents edit area.

4 Touch the print item to input.

The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed at the print layout.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Print layout Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋
Print item to input HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
Calendar block is N2
→ Char. count
displayed in a red 1 10 20 6 / 500
frame. 《 ← ＦＦＢＣ１２３・ → 》

★◎△ Calendar etc.

Twin
123/Sign ABCabc ▽
Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli-
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate Paste
spec.
Password
Cal.
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond.
protection

Count
Space
Change Change cond. Back

5 Press Cal. Cond. .

The Calendar conditions screen is displayed.

6 Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.

Calendar conditions [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Calendar blocks:1/1

Manual Startup
− ＋
Calendar block No.
HOME
Column 101
Calendar block is N2
0：A B Item 101
displayed in a red → Char. count
6 / 500
frame. 《 ←
1 10 20
→ 》
ＦＦＢＣ１２３・ Ink
1st screen 2nd screen Makeup

< Offset > < Substitution rules > < Zero-suppression >
Year ００００

Month ００００ Time count

Day ００００ Time count

Hour ００００

Minute ００００
Back

4-61 ●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count)

7 Press Time count .
The Time count conditions screen is displayed.

Time count conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋

HOME

0：A B
N2
→
1 10 20
《 ← ＦＦＢＣ１２３・ → 》
００
Time count Range

conditions ９９

Reset ００
Time count
Reset time ００ hour ００ minute

Renewal period 15 minutes

Back
Back

8 Input the range, reset value, reset time, and renewal period.

9 Press Back Back .

Returns to the Calendar conditions screen.

●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) 4-62

 4.14 Use the count function
4.14.1 Print count characters
(1) Count characters
● Prints by changing the count value in the specified increments at each printing.
Count conditions screen setup items
Setup item Contents
Value Count value to be printed next.
Range (minimum, maximum) Range of count value. Set for each digit.
Update (In progress) Number of printings after the last count update.
Count update printing cycle. Count is updated each printing the
Update (Units)
number of update units.
Increment Change value of count value at count update.
Direction Selects whether counted up or counted down at count update.
Jump After the count value matches the "Jump from:", the next count
(Jump from, Jump to) value is made the "Jump to:".
When Count reset of the Print description screen is pressed, the
Reset
count value is changed to the specified value.
Set capital alphabetical characters, small alphabetical characters
Count skip
or user patterns to skip in count block.
Selects whether or not leading 0 except the rightmost end is to be
Zero-suppression
replaced by a space.
The value input here is multiplied by the count value and the
Multiplier
result is made the print contents.

● A series of count characters is called a "Count block".

Maximum Count block count
Model type Maximum Count block count
UX-D8 8
(Maximum digit : 20 digits/count block
*Right-angled printing can set up to 8 digits in each Nozzle.
See the "4.14.4 Cautions for printing count character when using Right-angled printing" for details.)
●The count conditions are set for each count block.
●When there are multiple count blocks, the count conditions are set for each count block and each is
updated independently. There is no carry from another count block.

4-63 ●Use the count function

 Count block
Count conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Count blocks:1/2

− ＋ Manual Startup

HOME
Column 101
Count block is N2
0：A B Item 101
displayed in a → Char. count
1 10 20
blue frame. 《 》
6 / 500
ＣＣＣ ＣＣ・ Ink
1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen Makeup

Value ０００
Range ０００
０００
Update ０００００ (in progress)

００００１ (unit)

Back

● A range button is not displayed at the Count conditions screen corresponding to a print item with bar code
set.
● When a jump digit was set at the right side of a count digit and jump occurred, the count of the digit at the
left of the jump digit is updated.

●Use the count function 4-64

 (2) Count conditions setting examples
1 Number by +1 from "000" to "999".

Value ０００
Range ０００
９９９
Update ０００００ (in progress)

００００１ (unit)

Increment 01 Direction up down

Jump from: ・・・

to: ・・・
Reset ・・・

Count skip ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
Zero-suppression Disable Enable
Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

Count result
000 001 002 998 999

(Note) Range is set for each digit.

When range is set to "001" to "999", since it means setting with "0"
excluded at the 1 position, the count result becomes as follows :

Value ００１
Range ００１
９９９

Count result
001 002 003 008 009

011 012 013 018 019

021

4-65 ●Use the count function

2 Number by +1 from "A01" to "Z99".

Value Ａ０１
Range Ａ００
Ｚ９９
Update ０００００ (in progress)

００００１ (unit)

Increment 01 Direction up down

Jump from: ・９９

to: ・０１
Reset ・・・
Count skip ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
Zero-suppression Disable Enable

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

Count result
A01 A02 A03 A98 A99

B01 B02 B03 B98 B99

Z01 Z02 Z03 Z98 Z99

(Note) Since the count value skips in increments when an increment is input,
always choose a count value for jump setting which is not skipped.

●Use the count function 4-66

 3 Set user pattern as count value

Value ００
Range ００
０７
Update ０００００ (in progress)

００００１ (unit)

Increment 01 Direction up down

Jump from: ・
to: ・
Reset ・
Count skip ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
Zero-suppression Disable Enable

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

[Example] User pattern is defined as follows:

User pattern code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Definition pattern 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1

When printing one way 4 times and backwards 4 times by both ways printing, the same
column can be printed by the same numbers ( 1 to 4 ).
The count result becomes as shown below.

● The user pattern which can be used in count are 48 kinds up to code 47. Always use from top 00.
● Numeric and save characters can be combined.
[Example] Range [0 0 0 0 ]
[9 9 0909 ]

4-67 ●Use the count function

4 Reset the count value to a preset value.

Value ００１
Range ０００
９９９
Update ０００００ (in progress)

００００１ (unit)

Increment 01 Direction up down

Jump from: ９９９

to: ００１
Reset ００１
Count skip ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
Zero-suppression Disable Enable

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

Reset value "001" is set beforehand.

(a) New HMI

Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45
2
ABC123 1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Count reset

Operating Time Count Reset Makeup Ink

100 h
TEST
Print Count

1.000 START PRINTING STARTUP

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

(b) Previous HMI

Print description [Ready ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ]

Manual Shutdown
− ＋

Twin

1 2
Count reset

Ink operating time １００(hours)

Makeup Ink Count reset
Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
Print count １０００(prints) Print count
reset
Ink pressure 2 : ０．２６０
Ink pressure 1 : ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

message message message parameters management Menu

When Count reset is pressed, the count value is reset to the preset "001".

●Use the count function 4-68

 5 Print by replacing 0 of the count value with a space.

Value ００００
Range ００００
９９９９
Update ０００００ (in progress)

００００１ (unit)

Increment 01 Direction up down

Jump from: ・・・・

to: ・・・・
Reset ・・・・
Count skip ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
Zero-suppression Disable Enable

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

Zero-suppression "Enable" is set.

● "0" at the leading digit of the count character is replaced by a space and printed using the
zero-suppression function.
Count value “12” print comparison
Count conditions Print result
Zero-suppression disabled 0012
Zero-suppression enabled 12

4-69 ●Use the count function

(3) Operation
The Edit message screen is displayed.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋

HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
Calendar/count N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ・ → 》

★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽

Twin
123/Sign ABCabc Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli- Paste
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate
spec.

Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space
Change Change cond. Back

1 Press Calendar/count .
The display changes to the calendar/count keyboard and the calendar/count edit window are displayed.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Calendar/count
edit window OK
Manual Startup
− ＋
← ・ →
HOME
Column 101
OK Item 101
Cancel 0：A B
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ・ → 》

Calendar/count ★◎△ Calendar Twin

123/Sign ABCabc Logo / count etc. ▽ Delete Back space
keyboard Print
Year Month Day Hour Minu- Seco- Total Week Day Over-
te nd days num- of Insert write format
ber week
Print
Shift Time
Count character code count spec.
Password
Count ＋ − × ／ protection

（ ） . ： , Space
Back

●Use the count function 4-70

 2 Input Count C (count character).
The count character is displayed on the calendar/count edit screen.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

− ＋
Manual Startup OK
← ＣＣＣ・ →
HOME
Column 101
OK Item 101
Cancel 0：A B
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ・ → 》
Twin
★◎△ Calendar
123/Sign ABCabc Logo / count etc. ▽ Delete Back space
Print
Year Month Day Hour Minu- Seco- Total Week Day Over-
te nd days num- of Insert write format
ber week
Print
Shift Time
code count spec.
Password
Count ＋ − × ／ protection

（ ） . ： , Space
Back

3 Press OK OK .
The count character is displayed at the print contents edit area.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋

Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
Count block is N2
→ Char. count
displayed in a 1 10 20 6 / 500
blue frame. 《 ← ＣＣＣ・ → 》

★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽

Twin
123/Sign ABCabc Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli- Paste
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate
spec.

Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space
Change Change cond. Back

4-71 ●Use the count function

 4 Press Apply Apply
.
The character string of the print contents edit area is displayed in the print layout.
The count character input is applied.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋

HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→
Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ＣＣＣ・ → 》

★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽

Twin
123/Sign ABCabc Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli- Paste
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate
spec.
Count conditions
Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space
Change Change cond. Back

5 Press Count cond. .

The Count conditions screen is displayed.

6 Press Previous or Next and change the objective count block.

7 Press 1st screen , 2nd screen or 3rd screen and switch the count conditions
screen.

Count conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Count blocks:1/1

Manual Startup
− ＋

HOME
Objective count Column 101
Count block No.
Item 101
block is colored. N2
0：A B
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ＣＣＣ・ 》
Count conditions Ink
screen switching 1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen Makeup Changes the
Value ０００ objective
count block.
Range ０００
９９９
Update ０００００ (in progress)

００００１ (unit)

Back

●Use the count function 4-72

 (2nd screen)
Count conditions [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Count blocks:1/1

Manual Startup
− ＋

Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ＣＣＣ・ 》
Count conditions Ink
screen switching 1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen Makeup

Increment 01 Direction up down

Jump from: ・・・

to: ・・・
Reset ・・・

Back

(3rd screen)
Count conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Count blocks:1/1

Manual Startup
− ＋

Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500

Count conditions 《 ＣＣＣ・ 》

Ink
screen switching 1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen Makeup

Zero-suppression Disable Enable

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

Back

Back

8 Press Back Back

.

4-73 ●Use the count function

4.14.2 Use count multiplication printing
(1) Function
● Prints by changing the count value in the specified increments at each printing.

● Multiplies the count value by a predetermined value and prints the result.

● Prints left-justified.
● Matches the decimal part of the product to the number of count digits by rounding off.
● Enables zero-suppression setting for the last 0 after the decimal point.
(Example: 1.230 → 1.23)
● When the number of digits of the integer part of the product exceeds the number of digits of the input
count character, a "Count Overflow" error is generated.
● When an integer value is set for the count multiplier, the zero-suppression setting is not reflected.

●Use the count function 4-74

 (2) Operation
Shows the operation sequence when 0.3048 is set for the count multiplier and feet → meter converter
(1 foot → 0.3048 m) is performed and the result is printed.

1 Input Count C .
Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋

HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→
Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ＣＣＣ・ → 》

★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽

Twin
123/Sign ABCabc Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli- Paste
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate
spec. Count conditions
Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space
Change Change cond. Back

2 Press Count cond. .

The Count conditions screen is displayed.

3 Press Previous or Next and change the objective calendar block.

4 Press 3rd screen and switch the count conditions screen.

5 Display the 3rd screen of the count condition screens and input 0.3048 at the
count multiplier.

Count conditions [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Count blocks:1/1

Manual Startup
− ＋

Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
Count conditions 《 ＣＣＣ・ 》
Ink
screen switching 1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen Makeup

Zero-suppression Disable Enable

Multiplier
Multiplier ０．３０４８・・・・

Back
Back

4-75 ●Use the count function

6 The count value is multiplied by the input count multiplier and the result is
printed.
A printing example is shown in the table.
(When both Disable and Enable are set at zero-suppression)
Printing example of count multiplication printing (zero-suppression disabled)
Input characters CCCCCC
Count multiplier 0 . 3 04 8
Zero-suppression Disabled
Initial value Product Printed result Remarks
000001 0. 3 0 4 8 0. 3 0 4 8 -
000002 0.6096 0.6096 -
… … … -
000010 3. 0 4 8 0 3. 0 4 8 0 -
000011 3.3528 3.3528 -
… … … -
328082 99999. 3936 99999 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.
328083 99999. 6984 100000 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.
… … … …
999998 304799. 3904 304799 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.
999999 304799. 6952 304800 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.

Printing example of count multiplication printing (zero-suppression enabled)

Input characters CCCCCC
Count multiplier 0 . 3 04 8
Zero-suppression Enabled
Initial value Product Printed result Remarks
000001 0. 3 0 4 8 0. 3 0 4 8 -
000002 0.6096 0.6096 -
… … … -
000010 3. 0 4 8 0 3. 0 4 8 Last decimal digit is zero-suppressed.
000011 3.3528 3.3528 -
… … … -
328082 99999. 3936 99999 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.
328083 99999. 6984 100000 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.
… … … …
999998 304799. 3904 304799 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.
999999 304799. 6952 304800 Digits which cannot be printed are rounded off.

*Count characters are represented by C and spaces are represented by .

Precautions when using count multiplication printing

● When you want to return to normal count, input an invalid character at the count
multiplier to make the multiplier invalid.
● When a bar code is set for a count print item, a mask is applied to the count multiplier
input area and count multiplier cannot be input.
● Integer values can be input at the count multiplier.
● Alphabet, symbols, and saved characters cannot be input at the count multiplier.

●Use the count function 4-76

 4.14.3 Skip specified character and print (Count skip)
(1) Function
● Skip the character which was set and move to the next count value to print.
● "Count skip" characters is either one kind of capital alphabetical character, small alphabetical character or
user pattern.
● Up to 5 characters can be input as "Count skip" characters.
● The range of each digit to which count character is input may vary, however, the "Count skip" character
may not exceed the range of each digit.

(2) "Count skip" setting examples

Skip the alphabet "I" and count up by an increment of 1 from "000" to "ZZZ".

Value ０００
Range ０００
ＺＺＺ
Update ０００００ (in progress)

００００１ (unit)

Increment 01 Direction up down

Jump from: ・・・

to: ・・・
Reset ・・・
Count skip Ⅰ ・ ・ ・ ・
Zero-suppression Disable Enable

Multiplier ・・・・・・・・・・

Count Results
０００ ００１ ００２ ‥‥ ００Ｈ ００Ｊ

００Ｋ ００Ｌ ００Ｍ ‥‥ ０ＨＺ ０Ｊ０

０Ｊ１ ０Ｊ２ ０Ｊ３ ‥‥ ＨＺＺ Ｊ００

Ｊ０１ Ｊ０２ Ｊ０３ ‥‥ ＺＺＹ ＺＺＺ

4-77 ●Use the count function

(3) Operation
The procedures to skip the alphabets "I" and "Q" ,which are inputted to "Count skip" are shown below.

1 Input Count C .
Edit message [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋

HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→
Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ＣＣＣ・ → 》

★◎△ Calendar etc. ▽

Twin
123/Sign ABCabc Logo /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli- Paste
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate
spec. Count conditions
Cal. Password
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond. protection

Count
Space
Change Change cond. Back

2 Press Count cond. .

The Count conditions screen is displayed.

3 Press Previous or Next and change the objective conut block.

4 Set Range using numeric, capital alphabetical character, small alphabetical

character or user pattern.
Numeric cannot be set to Range (maximum) when count skip is used.
Open the 1st screen of Count conditions screen and input Value and Range.

Count conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Count blocks:1/1

Manual Startup
− ＋

Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ＣＣＣ 》
Count conditions Ink
screen switching 1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen Makeup

Value ＡＡＡ

Range (maximum) Range ＡＡＡ

ＺＺＺ
Update ００００００ (in progress)

０００００１ (unit)

Back

●Use the count function 4-78

 5 Press 2nd screen and switch Count conditions screen.
Input "I" and "Q" at "Count skip" on the 2nd screen of Count conditions.

Count conditions [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name[ ] Count blocks:1/1

Manual Startup
− ＋

Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
N2
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ＣＣＣ 》
Count conditions Ink
screen switching 1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen Makeup

Increment 01 Direction up down

Jump from: ・・・

to: ・・・
Reset ・・・

Count skip
Count skip I Ｑ ・ ・ ・
Back

6 Skip the characters inputted to "Count skip", then print the next count value.
See the figure below for print example.

ＡＡＡ ＡＡＢ ＡＡＣ ‥‥ ＡＡＨ ＡＡＪ

ＡＡＫ ＡＡＬ ＡＡＭ ‥‥ ＡＡＰ ＡＡＲ

ＡＡＳ ＡＡＴ ＡＡＵ ‥‥ ＡＨＺ ＡＪＡ

ＡＪＢ ＡＪＣ ＡＪＤ ‥‥ ＨＺＺ ＪＡＡ

ＪＡＢ ＪＡＣ ＪＡＤ ‥‥ ＺＺＹ ＺＺＺ

Precautions when using count skip printing

● When the "Count character" is added, overwritten or deleted, the confirmation
message "Changed skip condition" shows up on the screen and "Count skip"
character becomes invalid.
● As to Range (maximum), input either one kind of capital alphabetical character, small
alphabetical character or user pattern.
In addition, all "Count skip" characters must be included in the smallest range.
● Characters which were set as Value, Range, Jump or Reset cannot be input to "Count
skip".
● When the "Count skip" is set, the incremental value is 1=fixed.

4-79 ●Use the count function

4.14.4 Cautions for printing count character
when using Right-angled printing
● When Right-angled printing is set, count character can be set up to 8 digits for each Nozzle.
● Regarding the number of printing characters, see the "4.11.4 Cautions for printing calendar character
when using Right-angled printing".
● As shown in <Example of VALID count setup> below, Count block shall be set so that it is not extended
over Nozzle 1 and Nozzle 2.

<Example of VALID Count setup>

Allowed because
the count block
Nozzle 2 is only set in Nozzle 2
(or in Nozzle 1).
Count characters (1 block)
Nozzle 1

When characters are input When printed

<Example of INVALID Count setup>

Nozzle 2
Count characters (1 block)

Nozzle 1 Not allowed because

the count block is extended
over 2 Nozzles.

When characters are input When printed

●Use the count function 4-80

 4.15 Set the print specifications
4.15.1 Set the character height, character width, and orientation
(1) Function
● Sets the character height, character width, character orientation, and print start.

Print specifications [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Screen Message name [ ]
Com=0

Makeup Ink
switching
1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen 4th screen
Manual Startup
Character height ８５ （0∼99）

Ink drop use ０３ （1/1∼1/16） HOME

Character width ００００ （0∼3999）

The background color Character ＡＢＣ ＡＢＣ

Arrow : Prin-
is changed by nozzle. orientation
0:ＡＢＣ
→
1:ＡＢＣ
←
2:
←
3:
→
Change the
ting direction Nozzle 1
・Caracter height. target nozzle.
Printing method １（１：Single scan ２：Interlaced ３：Mixed）
Edit
・Ink drop use. message
Print start
・Caracter width. delay Print
・Printing method. format
Changes the print
・Print start delay. Sensor Print start
Change unit start delay input
００００
Print start delay units.
（0∼9999）SC Back

1 Character height
● The character height can be specified.

2 Ink drop use percentage

● Sets the ratio of drops used in printing. For example, ink drop use 1/3 prints at a ratio of 1 in 3 ink
drops. The 2 ink drops are recovered from the gutter.
Setting range of ink drop use percentage
Model type Nozzle diameter Set value
UX-D8 65μm 1/1 to 1/16
● When ink drop use is 1/1 or 1/2, high speed printing is possible. For ink drop use 1/16, low speed
printing is performed and the print quality improves.
● When Format setup is Free layout on the Change message screen, setting range of ink drop use
percentage is 1/2 to 1/16.
● When Right-angled printing is set, Ink drop use which can be set will change according to the number
of characters which are input in one line.

Max. number of characters per line Value

1-8 characters / line 1/1 to 1/16
9-10 characters / line 1/3 to 1/16
11-12 characters / line 1/4 to 1/16

4-81 ●Set the print specifications

3 Character width
● The character width can be specified.

(1) When the product matching speed function or the enhance function is NOT USED:
● Set the character width within the range from 0 to 3999.

(2) When the product matching speed function is USED: (Rotary encoder is connected)
(2.1) Nozzle diameter 65μm
● Character width is set by Ink drop use percentage as indicated below.
Table 4.15.1 Setting of character width
Ink drop use percentage setting Character width setting
1/1 002 or larger
1/2 001 or larger
1/3 to 1/16 000 or larger
(3) When the enhance function is used:
● Character width will be automatically set to "0" (zero). This "Character width" setting "0"
will be kept afterward.
● For rotary encoder wiring and setup, see the Technical Manual “4.3.2-1 Rotary encoder
specifications, wiring and switch setting”.

4 Character orientation
●Printing direction of characters can be set.
●Settings and print results are as shown below.
a
Setting Direction of transport Printing results Direction of transport
0:ABC a← ABC123
→ →b ＡＢ b
321CBA Ｃ1
23
1:ABC a← 321CBA
← →b ABC123
ABC123
2: a←
ABC
Example of setting "0:ABC→"
← →b ABC123
and Direction of transport "a".
3: a←
ABC ABC123

→ ABC123
→b

Precautions when setting Character orientation for Right-angled printing

● When Right-angled printing is set, according to the number of characters which are
input, the vertical range of printing may vary as shown the diagram below when
Character orientation is set to 0 or 1, or when it is set to 2 or 3. Please confirm it
in advance.
Direction of Direction of
transport transport

Print target Print target

Set to 0 or 1 Set to 2 or 3

●Set the print specifications 4-82

 5 Printing method
● Two printing methods are selectable: "single scan", "interlaced" and "mixed".
● A printing method will be automatically selected in accordance with the print format setup and
the ink drop charge rule.
Display of Printing method
Icon Ink Drop Charge Rule Classification Printing method
When there are multiple printing lines,
Single
Standard (Single scan)
scan
multiple lines are printed in turn.

Inter- Standard (Interlaced), Multiple lines are printed at the same

laced
Dot mixed interlaced time.

Printing is done while switching

Mixed Mixed single scan and interlaced between single scan and interlaced for
each column.

● When making interlaced prints, perform the following setup.

(i) Ensure that the same print format is employed for all items.
(ii) Ensure that the same line count setting is employed for all columns.
(iii) The ink drop use percentage is 1/1 to 1/4.
Perform overall column setup. The format for the first item is
then applied to all the other items so as to provide interlaced
setup. When making a 1-line print, the single scan predominates
even if you perform steps (i) through (iii) .

● In the case of free layout, printting method is single scan fixed.

● In the case of Right-angled printing, printing method is single scan fixed.

4-83 ●Set the print specifications

6 Print start delay
● The printing start position can be specified.
● After setting in character units or mm units, fine adjust in scan units.
● When you want to input in mm units, input "Line speed".
● The positional relationship between the sensor and nozzle is as indicated below.

When the nozzle is positioned before the sensor When the nozzle is positioned after the sensor
Sensor Sensor
c Direction of transport c Direction of transport
a a
0023 0023

b Print target b Print target

Nozzle center Nozzle center
Print start delay=a-b (mm) Print start delay=a+b (mm)

● Specify the print start delay (printing start position) as suggested below.
(i) Measure the length of the print start delay.
(ii) Measure the inter-character distance (C).
(iii) Divide the value obtained in (i) by the value obtained in (ii). Enter the resulting value.
a+b
: Setting value
c

● When a product speed matching function is not provided, if the ink drop use percentage (High-speed
print mode), character width, character size or number of lines is changed, the set value of the print
start delay can be adjusted so that the time until printing starts will not change.
● When a product speed matching function is provided, if the pulse rate division actor is changed, the set
value of the print start delay can be adjusted so that the time until printing starts will not change.
● When Right-angled printing is set, print start delay can be set from 3 to 3999.

2nd screen of “Print specifications” screen

Print specifications [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Screen switching Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen

Product speed matching Encoder Manual Startup

Line speed ０００００ [m/min.] Input '0' if unknown

HOME
Pulse rate div. Factor ００１ （1/1∼1/999 Enter denominator.）

Speed compensation Disable Enable

Speed compensation fine control ００００ (-50∼+50)SC

Distance between print head and work ００ [mm]

Nozzle 1
Select nozzle

Repeat print Edit

message
００００ (0: none, 1∼9998, 9999: Continuous)
Repeat count
Print Changes the repeat
format
intervals input units.
Change unit

Repeat intervals ０００００ （0∼99999）SC

Back

●Set the print specifications 4-84

 7 Product speed matching
● When printing is conducted with this feature activated, the character width is maintained
irrespective of the print target transport speed changes.
● The Printing by "Auto" method is performed according to the change of speed without a rotary
encoder.
● Enter "Print Target width" and "Actual Print width" in mm for "Auto".
● "Repeat count" and "Target sensor filter: Until end of printing" on "Print specifications" can not
be used when setting "Auto".
Refer to "4.3.5 Product speed matching function without a rotary encoder" of the Technical
Manual for "Auto" method.
● Product speed matching "Enhance" is the function of making prints on the print objects which
are being transported at constant intervals against the conveyor speed fluctuation. It is similar to
Product speed matching using encoder but the maximum print speed of Product speed matching
"Enhance" is improved, compared to that of using encoder.
● Refer to "4.3.6 Enhance function" of the Technical Manual for "Enhance" method.
Difference between product speed matching setting
None Encoder Auto Enhance
Prints per individual Printing is performed Printing is performed The conveyor speed is
scan for an interval of scan by scan at each according to the detected by the encoder
a definite period of encoder pulse. change of speed. and making prints on the
time. print objects which are
being transported at
constant intervals.
Refer to "4. Electric signal connection" of the Technical Manual for details.

8 Line speed
● Inputs the line speed.
● When the line speed was input, the print start delay and repeat intervals set values can be input in mm
units by pressing change unit.
● The selectable setting ranges from 0 to 999.9 m/minutes.
● This feature cannot be activated if the product speed matching feature is enable.

9 Pulse rate division factor

● Specifies the pulse rate division Factor that determines the intervals at which the encoder signal is to
be recognized.
● The selectable setting ranges from 1/1 to 1/999.
● When a setting of 1/1 is selected, no pulse rate division Factor is effected.
● This feature cannot be activated if the product speed matching feature is disabled.

10 Speed compensation
● Set to prevent changes in the print position.
● Cannot be set when a Product speed matching feature is not specified.
● Adjusts print start delay according to the set value of "Distance between print head and work".
● Cannot be used when Repeat print is specified.
● Note that a Print Overlap Fault may be generated when the printing interval is extremely short when
the Speed compensation setting is changed from "Disable" to "Enable".
● Fine adjusts the print start delay from the setting value of the Speed compensation fine control.
However, the following condition must be satisfied.
0 <=[Print start delay]+[Speed compensation fine control]
● Set values for "Speed compensation" and "Speed compensation fine control" are not memorized per
print date but held as a common value.

4-85 ●Set the print specifications

11 Distance between print head and work.
● Inputs the distance between the print head and the print target.
● When product speed matching is "encoder" and "Speed compensation" was set to "Enable", the print
start delay is adjusted by considering the distance between the print head and the print target.
When "Speed compensation" is set to "Disable", the distance between the print head and the print target
is not referenced, even if set.

Print specifications [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen

Product speed matching Manual Startup

Auto
Print Target width ００６０ (mm 0∼9999)
HOME
Actual Print width ００３０ (mm 0∼9999)

Speed compensation Disable Enable

12 Print Target width

● Enter "Print Target width" in mm for "Auto".
Input the length of the place over which the print target is detected.
● The Print Target width setting range is from 0 to 9999.
● If "Print Target width" is not entered, the print is made with the same interval as when the Speed
matching function is not used.
13 Actual Print width
● Enter "Actual Print width" in mm for "Auto".
● The Actual Print width setting range is from 0 to 9999.
● The value for "Actual Print width" must be smaller than "Print Target width".
● If "Actual Print width" is not entered, the print is made with the same interval as when the Speed
matching function is not used.
13 Actual Print width

ABC

The place over which

the print target is detected.

12 Print Target width

3rd screen of “Print specifications” screen

Print specifications [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45
Screen switching Message name [ ]
Com=0

Makeup Ink
1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen
Manual Startup
Target sensor timer ０００ （1/10sec 0: none 1∼999）

Target sensor filter Time setup Until end of print. HOME

Setup value ００５０ (ms 0∼9999)

Ink Drop Charge Rule Standard(single scan/interlaced)

Standard(single : It prints by the Single scan or Interlaced.

Nozzle 1
scan/interlaced)
Edit
message
Print
format

Back

●Set the print specifications 4-86

 14 Target sensor timer
● You can specify the time for displaying a fault message when the sensor is continuously ON.
● When the sensor on time exceeds a set value, the message "Target Sensor Fault" is displayed.
● If the "Target sensor timer" feature is not needed, select a setting of 0.
● The selectable setting is from 0.0 to 99.9 seconds.

15 Target sensor filter

● Perform this setup when you intend to maintain operation normality even in the event of
chattering.
● The time for ignoring chattering is set for when a sensor signal chatters when printed matter shields the
sensor from light.
● When a fault occurs due to chattering, the message "Print Overlap Fault" is displayed.
● If the target sensor filter feature is not needed, select a setting of 0.
● The selectable setting ranges from 0 to 9999 milliseconds.
● "Target sensor filter: Until end of printing" can not be used when setting "Auto" on "Product speed
matching".
●The term "chattering" refers to a state where signal voltage instability occurs when the sensor
signal starts or ends.
16 Ink drop charge rule (It can be set for each nozzle.)
● There are three rules of Standard, Mixed single scan and interlaced, and Dot mixed interlaced in the
Ink Drop Charge Rule.
● With this function, print quality will be better than the case that dot mixture data is printed by the
single scan especially when ink drop use is from 1/1 to 1/4.
Differences of each rule of the Ink drop charge rule
Method Print sample

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5)

Standard (Single scan) 5×8
5 ×8
5×8 12×16 12×16 7×10 5 ×8
All the columns are printed by single scan.

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5)

Standard (Interlaced) 5×8 5×8 5×8 5× 8 5 ×8
5×8 5×8 5×8 5× 8 5 ×8
All the columns are printed by interlaced.

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5)

5×8 5×8
Mixed single scan and interlaced
5×8 7×10 5× 5
5×8 7×10 12×16 5× 5 5 ×5
Interlaced Single scan Single scan Interlaced Single scan
Rules are changed by column.

(Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3) (Column 4) (Column 5)

Dot mixed interlaced 5×8
5×8 5×8 7×10
12×16 5×8 5×8 18×24 7×10
All the columns are printed by interlaced.
4-87 ●Set the print specifications
● When the conditions in the following table are met during mixed single/interlaced control, printing that
mixes single scan and interlaced is possible.
Conditions for interlaced printing at Mixed single scan and interlaced
No. Conditions Example of print data

1 Barcodes are not set. (Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3)

5× 8
When number of line is two or more, all fonts of 7×10 5× 8
2
items in each column are the same. 18×24 7×10 5× 8
3 Ink drop use is from 1/1 to 1/4. Single scan Interlaced

● When the conditions in the following table are met during dot mixed interlaced, interlaced printing with
mixed dots is possible.

Conditions for interlaced printing at Dot mixed interlaced

No. Conditions Print example
1 All fonts of items in each column are the same.
2 Barcodes are not set.
Following (1) or (2) is satisfied in all columns. (Column 1) (Column 2) (Column 3)
(Interlaced printing is also possible when all 5× 8
columns are configured only with the condition 7×10 5× 8
(2).)
18×24 7×10 5× 8
3 (1) When number of line is two or more
All fonts of items in each column are the Interlaced
same.
(2) When number of line is one
The font of items is 12×16 or 18×24.
4 Ink drop use is from 1/1 to 1/4.

● 1-line columns with 12×16 or 18×24 font at Dot mixed interlaced will be split into 2-line (or 3-line) in
the IJP and printed. As a result of a sprit 1-line of 12×16 or 18×24, borders of characters might look
being pushed down, and set the Line spacing only for the case.
But, uneven printing happens when product speed matching is used at low speed .
● The number of print formats that can be set with dot mixture is up to eight at all ink drop charge rules.
And the ink drop use can not be mixed.

● Ink Drop Charge Rule Precautions

Precautions
No. Precautions Conditions
The higher the speed the bigger misalignment of lines at high speed without Dot mixed
1
product speed matching. interlaced only
Uneven printing happens at divided positions when product speed matching Dot mixed
2
is used for 1-line printing at low speed. interlaced only

●Set the print specifications 4-88

 17 Leading character width control
● Set to prevent shrinking of the leading print character width at high speed line printing.
● Can be set when product speed matching is "None" "Enhance".
● As a means of preventing shrinking of the leading character width, unprinted particles are inserted at
the "First line width" and "Second line width" of the leading print character.
● The number of unprinted characters that can be inserted is 0 to 32.

Page 4 of "Print specifications" screen

Print specifications [Stop ]

Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
1st screen 2nd screen 3rd screen 4th screen
Manual Startup

Leading character with control Disable Enable

HOME
Avoid shrink of leading character
First row width ０２ （ ０∼３２）
Secind row width ０１ （ ０∼３２）

Nozzle 1

Nozzle-Space Alignment Disable Edit

message
Print
format

Back

● When all the necessary conditions of 1 to 4 below are satisfied, leading character print control is enabled.

Necessary conditions for leading character width control

No. Item Conditions
1 Product speed matching Set to None or Enhance.
[Print format: Individual setup, Overall setup]
Set the number of rows to 1 row or 2 rows.
2 The number of lines
[Print format: Free layout]
Not special setting.
[Product speed matching: None]
Set Ink drop use to 1/1 or 1/2.
(High-speed character model : Set High-speed print mode to M1.)
3 Ink drop use
[Product speed matching: Enhance]
Set Ink drop use to 1/1.
(High-speed character model : Set High-speed print mode to M1.)
[Ink drop use: 1/1]
All character sizes can be used.
4 Character size [Ink drop use: 1/2]
Set the character size 4×5, 5×5, 5×8(5×7), 9×8(9×7),
7×10, 5×3 (chimney), 5×5(chimney), or 7×5(chimney).

4-89 ●Set the print specifications

●The recommended value when setting by leading character width control depends on the number of
vertical dots.

<Vertical dots calculation method>

◯ Print format: Individual setup, Overall setup
Vertical dots=First line character size + Second Line character size
◯ Print format: Free layout
Vertical dots=Item Y coordinate+ character size

Leading character width control recommended values

Leading character Ink drop use: 1/1 Ink drop use: 1/2
width control First row width Second row width First row width Second row width
1 6 3 3 2
2 6 3 3 2
3 6 3 3 2
4 5 2 3 2
5 4 2 2 1
6 4 2 2 1
7 4 2 2 1
8 4 2 2 1
9 3 1 1 0
10 3 1 1 0
11 2 1 0 0
12 2 1 0 0
13 2 1 0 0
14 2 1 0 0
15 2 1 0 0
16 2 1 0 0
17 1 0 0 0
18 1 0 0 0
19 1 0 0 0
20 1 0 0 0
21 1 0 0 0
22 1 0 0 0
23 1 0 0 0
24 1 0 0 0
25 1 0 0 0
26 1 0 0 0
27 1 0 0 0
28 1 0 0 0
29 1 0 0 0
30 1 0 0 0
31 1 0 0 0
32 1 0 0 0

●Set the print specifications 4-90

 18 Nozzle-Space Alignment
● Set it to fill up the empty space between the lines printed by each nozzle.

０１２３４５６７８９ ０１２３４５６７８９ Nozzle 2

０１２３４５６７８９ Nozzle 1

０１２３４５６７８９
Normal mode Sample when "Close up" is applied

● Set it to increase the space available between the lines printed by each nozzle.

０１２３４５６７８９ Nozzle 2

０１２３４５６７８９

０１２３４５６７８９ ０１２３４５６７８９ Nozzle 1

Normal mode Sample when "Spread" is applied

● Window to select the function will be shown when you press the button of "Nozzle-Space Alignment"
on the 4th screen of "Print specifications".
● When Right-angled printing is set, Nozzle-space alignment is "Disable" fixed.

Nozzle 1

Nozzle-Space Alignment Disable Edit

message
Print
format
Disable
Close up Cancel
Spread

(Window to select the function)

● Select "Close up" to narrow the Nozzle-Space.

Next, set the print distance to get the Nozzle-Space you need.
Finally, set the character height (a single line) you want.
(Nozzle-Space will not change even when the character height is (a single line) changed.)
Guide 1 : Nozzle-Space becomes 0 mm when the print distance is set to 18 mm.
Guide 2 : Nozzle-Space becomes 1 mm when the print distance is set to 15 mm.

● Select "Spread" to widen the Nozzle-Space.

("Spread" button is available only when <Format setup> on "Change message" screen is set to "Overall
setup". )
Next, set the print distance to fit onto the print area.
Finally, set the character height (a single line) you want.
(The smaller the character height (a single line) is, the larger the Nozzle-Space becomes.)
Guide : The character height becomes 21 mm when the print distance is set to 15 mm.
Nozzle-Space becomes 17 mm when the character height of both Nozzle 1 and Nozzle 2 is set
to 2 mm.
Print Example [Dot matrix 5×5, Print distance 15 mm]

2mm ０１２３４５６７８９ ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ ａｂｃｄｅｆｇｈｉｊ

17mm 21mm

2mm ０１２３４５６７８９ ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪ ａｂｃｄｅｆｇｈｉｊ

4-91 ●Set the print specifications

[Precaution for use]
● Print quality changes when Nozzle-space Alignment is applied, depending on print conditions.
Refer to Table 1 below for the maximum rate of Ink drop use for each character size and the number of lines,
when the print distance is set to 15 mm.

Table 1. Recommended maximum rate of ink drop use when Nozzle-Space Alignment is applied
Recommended maximum rate of ink drop use
Print
2 lines 4 lines 6 lines 8 lines
Character size distance
(1-line (2-line (3-line (4-line
(mm)
on each nozzle) on each nozzle) on each nozzle) on each nozzle)
5×5 (chimney) 15 f/3 f/2 f/2 f/2
4×5 15 f/3 f/2 f/2 f/2
5×5 15 f/3 f/2 f/2 f/2
5×5 (chimney) 15 f/3 f/2 f/2 f/2
7×5 (chimney) 15 f/3 f/2 f/2 f/2
5×7 (9×7) 15 f/3 f/2 f/2 f/2
5×8 (9×8) 15 f/2 f/2 f/2 f/2
7×10 15 f/2 f/2 f/3 f/3
11×11 15 f/2 f/2 - -
10×12 15 f/2 f/2 - -
12×16 15 f/2 f/2 - -
18×24 15 f/3 - - -
24×32 15 f/3 - - -
30×40 15 f/3 - - -
36×48 15 f/3 - - -
48×64 15 f/3 - - -

● "Nozzle-Space Alignment" is available only when <Format setup> on "Change message" screen is set to
either "Overall setup" or "Free layout".
When "Printing method" is set to "Mixed" for the print items of Nozzle 1 or Nozzle 2 which is shown in
figures below, it may lead to print disturbance.
Please check the print quality.

In case there are "Mixed dots" In case there are "NO Mixed dots"

5×8
Nozzle 2 Nozzle 2
5×8 5×8 5×8 5×8

5×8 5×8
Nozzle 1 Nozzle 1
5×8 5×8 5×8

●Set the print specifications 4-92

 4.15.2 Set repeat printing
(1)Overview
● This is set to print the same print description continuously.
● Set the "Repeat intervals" and "Repeat count" for repeat printing.
● Repeat printing can not be used when setting "Auto" on "Product speed matching".

1 Repeat intervals
● The print target size can be specified.
● This setup is to be performed when the print target is transported while it is in close contact.
● After setting in character units or mm units, fine adjust in scan units.
● When you want to input in mm units, input "Line speed".
● Perform the following calculations for repeat intervals setup purposes.
(i) On an individual scan basis
(1-digit character width × number of digits - trailing character correction value)
× (print target size/all-digit print width)
(ii) On an individual character basis
Number of digits × (print target size/all-digit print width)

● 1-digit character width = (horizontal character size + inter-character space) × character

width increase setting
● Trailing character correction value = inter-character space × character width increase
setting + 1

(Example) Print target size: 64 mm; all-digit print width: 25 mm;

number of digits: 6; character size: 5 × 7 dots; inter-character space: 2 dots
● On an individual scan basis
((5+2)×1×6-(2×1+1))×(64/25)=99.84→100
● On an individual character basis
6×(64/25)=15.36→15

● Round off the calculation results to the nearest whole number.

Print target Print target

Repeat intervals

2 Repeat count
● You can preset the number of repeats.
● If repeat printing is not needed, set the number to "0".
● Printing is performed in accordance with the repeat printing mode setup.
● The relationship between the repeat printing mode and the count is as stated below.

Setting
Mode
2 to 9998 9999
Printing is repeated a preselected
Signal ON number of times at predefined Repeat printing is performed
period intervals while the print target is while the print target is detected.
detected.
Printing is repeated a preselected
Once the print target is detected,
OFF - ON number of times at predefined
repeat printing is performed until
transition intervals once the print target is
it is aborted.
detected.

4-93 ●Set the print specifications

4.15.3 Set various printing
(1) Function
“Various print setup” screen

Various print setup [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Calendar offset Offset from yesterday From today
Manual Startup

EAN Prefix Edit message Print format HOME

Barcode printing Normal Reverse
QR Error correction level M (15%) Q (25%)

Revers scan print Disable Enable

Back

1 Calendar offset
● Sets whether to make it today or yesterday when finding whether the calendar month or year offset is set.

2 EAN Prefix
● Whether to set bar code EAN-13, EAN-8 country code by character input or print format is selected.

Number of digits of bar code

Country code Data Check digit Total number of digits
EAN-13 2 10 1 13
EAN-8 2 5 1 8

EAN Prefix
Set value
Character input Print format
Set by print format without
Country code is input at the head
Handling of country code including country code in the
of the data.
data.
Print format screen Country code is not displayed. Set the country code.
For EAN-13, input 12 digits and For EAN-13 input 10 digits and
for EAN-8, input 7 digits, all for EAN-8, input 5 digits, with-
Edit message screen including the country code. out including the country code.
However, check digit is However, the check digit is
excluded. excluded.

● When the country code is changed at the Print format screen, the country code for all the bar
code items in that message is changed to the same value.
● For UPC-A, input 11 digits including the prefix code at the edit message screen.

●Set the print specifications 4-94

 3 Barcode print
● Set the barcode print system.
Normal
The barcode dot data will be printed as is.
Normal
(With yellow ink, a yellow bar is created.)
The barcode dot data will be reversed and
printed. Reverse
Reverse (The work color will become the color of
the bar. The ink color will be that of
background.)

Quiet zone

● The white areas (quiet zone) are necessary at both ends of barcode for the barcode to be recognized.
Input one or two characters with all dots marked out (provided on numeric keyboard screen) to the
previous column and next column items.
● For DM codes and QR codes, printing will be performed in normal mode even if reverse is selected.
For DM codes and QR codes, process data to reverse mode at reader side before reading.
● When adding Human Readable code, the barcode dot data is printed as is, even if set "Reverse".

4 QR Error correction level

● Choose an error correction level from "M" or "Q".
Error correction level Data restoration percentage
M Approx. 15%
Q Approx. 25%
See the Technical Manual "9. APPENDIX" for details.
5 Reverse scan printing
● Selects whether or not reverse scan control which deflects the particles in the reverse order of the
conventional order is to be used.
● The printing tilt when the print target is transported at high speed becomes smaller than the
conventional control system.
Refer to "9. Appendix" of the technician's manual for more information.

4-95 ●Set the print specifications

4.15.4 Fine adjust the print specifications (Adjust print parameters)
(1) Function
● Starts from the Print description screen.
● Current message print specifications "character height", "character width", "print start delay" and "Pulse rate
div. Factor" settings are easily set.
● Since changes to the set value are immediately reflected in the printing, the changes be easily confirmed while
printing.
● After setting in character units or mm units, fine adjust in scan units.
● When you want to input in mm units, input "Line speed" in the print specifications screen.

(a) New HMI

1 Press menu ADJUST .
The Adjust print parameters screen will be displayed.
Adjust print parameters × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45
2
ABC123 1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Character Height Print Start Delay Scanning Unit Reciprocative Print Start Delay

−
99 ＋ −
4 SC ＋
Scanning Unit

96 5
０
SC
Forward
Character Width Pulse Rate Div. Factor Direction
0
−
0 ＋ −
1/ 1 ＋ ０
SC
Reverse
0 1/ 1 Direction
0

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

(b) Previous HMI

“Adjust print parameters” screen
Adjust print parameters [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup

− ＋ HOME

Character height − ８５ ＋ （0∼99）

Twin
Character width − ０００２ ＋ （0∼3999）

Print start delay − ００００ ＋ （0∼9999）SC

Change unit

(1/1∼1/999 Enter
Pulse rate div. Factor − ００１ ＋ denominator.)
Save
Back

(Note) If various settings are changed when the printing is performed frequently,
the faults such as "Print Overlap fault", "Print Data Changeover In
Progress V" or "Invalid Print Start Timing" may occur.

●Set the print specifications 4-96

 4.16 Using the AI code input support function
(1) Function
● "AI code" is the abbreviation for "Application Identifier".
AI code is an identification code that manages the data items attached to the head of a product code,
expiration date, quantity, lot No., and various other data, and is represented by a 2 to 4 digit number.
● AI code is used with barcode standards established by GS1.
"GS1" is the abbreviation for "Global Standard One". It is an international organization that designs and proposes
international standards.
● Items set by 4 kinds of barcodes (Code128, DM, QR or micro QR) can use the AI code input support function.
● The following AI codes can be input by AI code input support function.

AI code Data item Data length Character types that can be input
01 GTIN Fixed 14 Numeric
10 Batch or Lot Number Variable 20 Alphanumeric/ASCII symbols
11 Production Date Fixed 6 "YYMMDD" fixed or numeric
15 Best Before Date Fixed 6 "YYMMDD" fixed or numeric
17 Expiration Date Fixed 6 "YYMMDD" fixed or numeric
21 Serial Number Variable 20 Alphanumeric/ASCII symbols
30 Variable Count Variable 8 Numeric
91 Company Internal Information Variable 30 Alphanumeric/ASCII symbols
310* Net Weight - Kilograms - Trade Fixed 6 Numeric characters
320* Net Weight - Pounds - Trade Fixed 6 Numeric characters

*Indicates the number of digits after Variable length is the maximum

the decimal point. number of characters.
(0 to 6 can be input.)

● "FNC1" code must be added at the end of "Variable" data length items.
("FNC1" indicates the end of the variable length code.)
If "FNC1"is not input, the system will add it automatically
● If even one of the following conditions is satisfied, "Invalid Barcode" will be displayed.

No. Data length Condition

1 Number of input characters does not match the data length.
2 Fixed A character other than an input able character was input.
3 Seven or more characters were set at the * part of AI code (310*) and (320*).
4 Number of input characters exceeds the data length.
5 Variable A character other than an input able character was input
6 "FNC1" code was input at other than the beginning or end of an item.
*The AI code itself (2 to 4 digits) is not included in the input character count.
*The "FNC1" code at the end of a data length "Variable" item is not included in the input character count.

4-97 ● Using the AI code input support function

(2) Operation
The Edit message screen is displayed.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup

− ＋ HOME
abcde Column 101
fghij
klmno Item 101
Next item
Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ・ → 》

ＡＩ Calendar
123/Sign ABCabc /count Delete Back space
Print
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format
Print
Dupli- Paste
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate spec.

Cal.
AI Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond.
Code Code Space
Count
FNC1 B C cond.
Change Change Back

1 Select AI from the input mode.

AI code list is displayed.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
− ＋

HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← ・ → 》

ＡＩ Calendar
123/Sign ABCabc /count Delete Back space

Over- Print
Ａ Ｂ(01)Ｃ: GTIN
Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write
01 / 02
format

Dupli- Print
Ｋ Ｌ(10)Ｍ: Batch
Ｎ or Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ
Lot Number
Ｔ cate Paste spec.
(11) : Production Date Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Cal.
Ｕ Ｖ(15)Ｗ: BestＸbefore
ＹDate
Ｚ cond.
Cancel
(17) : Expiration Date
Code Code Space
Count
FNC1 B C cond.
Change Change
Back

AI code list

● Using the AI code input support function 4-98

 2 Select (11): Production Date from the AI code list.
[11 YYMMDD] is automatically input at the barcode item.

Edit message [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Apply
Manual Startup
− ＋
Apply HOME
Column 101
0：A B Item 101
→ Char. count
1 10 20 6 / 500
《 ← １１ＹＹＭＭＤＤ ・ → 》

ＡＩ Calendar
123/Sign ABCabc /count Delete Back space

Over- Print
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write format

Dupli- Paste Print

Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ cate spec.
Cal.
AI Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ cond.
Code Code Space
Count
FNC1 B C cond.
Change Change
Back

3 Press Apply .
The character string of the print content edit area is displayed on the print layout.

4-99 ● Using the AI code input support function

 5. MAINTENANCE
(1) Functions
Item Description Reference
Unit information ●Displays the unit TYPE-FORM, serial number, etc. 5.1
Operation management ●Displays the operational status. 5.2
Test print ●Prints without any start print signal input. 5.3
Excitation V update ●Finds the optimum excitation V-ref. value to Technical Manual
(Nozzle test) maintain good print quality. 6.10
●Displays the generation status of error and alarm
View alarm history 9.3
messages.
Technical Manual
Circulation control ●Controls the ink and makeup circulation system.
6.1
View software version ●Displays the name of the registered software. 5.4
●Displays the description of the serial
Technical Manual
Comm. monitor communications between an external device and the
5.6
IJ printer.
Password protection ●Displays the functions that can be executed. 5.5
Solenoid valve / pump ●Checks the operation of the solenoid valve and Technical Manual
test pump. 6.13
●When the exchange time in periodic replacement
Periodic replacement Technical Manual
parts comes, the message to inform them of the
parts mgmt. 6.14
exchange can be displayed.

(2) Operation
1 Press Maintenance in the Print description screen.
The maintenance menu screen is displayed.

Maintenance menu [Ready ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

Manual Shutdown
Operation
Unit information management Test print
HOME

Excitation V update View alarm

Circulation control
(Nozzle test) history

View software Password

version Comm. monitor protection

Periodic
Solenoid valve/
replacement
pump test parts mgmt.

Back

●Maintenance 5-1
 5.1 Confirm the Unit information
(1) Functions
●Displays the unit TYPE-FORM, serial number, login information, and ink type.

Item Description
TYPE-FORM ● Displays the TYPE-FORM of the unit.
Serial number ● Displays the serial number of the unit.
Ink type ● Displays the type of ink used.

(2) Operation
Press Unit information in the Maintenance menu.
1
Unit information [Ready ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink
TYPE-FORM UX-D860

Manual Shutdown
Serial number 99999999
HOME

Ink type 1067K

Back

5-2 ●Confirm the Unit information

5.2 Monitor operational status
(1) Functions
● Displays the operational status of the IJ printer.
● Saves the Ink operating time and Print count once an hour (1 minute each hour).
When there was a power failure, returns to the previously saved state.
● The following items are also displayed in the Print description screen (initial menu).
(Items displayed in Print description screen: Ink operating time, Cumulative op. time, Print count, Ink pressure.)
Item Description
●Displays the operating time from the last ink replacement.
Ink operating time
●At ink replacement, set to “0”. Displays up to 9,999 hours.
(variable value)
●When the Ink alarm time is exceeded, displays an ink replacement alarm message.
●Displays the time which becomes the ink replacement standard.
Ink alarm time
●Always displays the standard value.
●Displays the cumulative operating time. The value cannot be changed.
Cumulative op. time
●Displays up to 999,999 hours.
Print count ●Displays the number of printings.
(variable value) ●A value of 0 to 999,999,999 can be set.
Ink name ●Displays the type of ink used.
Makeup name ●Displays the type of makeup used.
●Displays the ink viscosity.
Ink viscosity
●Standard value is 100.
●Displays the ink pressure.
Ink pressure
●The standard value is always displayed.
Ambient temperature ●Displays the ambient temperature and allowable ambient temperature.
Deflection voltage ●Displays the deflection voltage in the Ready state.
Excitation V-ref. ●Displays the set excitation V-ref. value.
Excitation frequency ●Displays the nozzle excitation frequency.

●Monitor operational status 5-3

 (2) Operation
(a) New HMI

1 Press menu SETTINGS .

The Operation management screen is displayed.
Operation management × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Ink Operating Time Ink Alarm Time Cumulative Op.Time

（Standard Value：1200）
0h 1,200 h 0h
Ink/Makeup Ink Viscosity Ink Pressure（Standard Value：0.255）
（Standard Value：100）
0.255 MPa
10６７K/S100A 100 0.255
Deflection Voltage Excitation V-ref（Range：0-19） Excitation Frequency
5.7 11
kV 68.9 kHz
5.7 11
Ambient Temperature
（Correct Range：0-45）

20 ℃ For details of
Print Count
Calibrate touch Calibrate touch screen coordinates ,
0 screen coordinates refer to "7.4 Touch screen coordinate
correction".
HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

(b) Previous HMI

1 Press Operation management in the Maintenance menu.

Operation management [Ready ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink
Ink operating time ００００ (hours)
Ink alarm time １２００ (hours; standard value: 1200) Manual Shutdown
Cumulative op. time ００００００ (hours)
Print count ０００００００００ (prints) HOME

Ink, makeup 1067K, S100 A

Ink viscosity 100 (standard value:100)
Ink pressure (Nozzle 2) 0．255 (MPa; standard value: 0．255)
(Nozzle 1) 0．255 (MPa)
Ambient temperature 20 (℃; range: 0∼45)
Deflection voltage (Nozzle 2) 5. 7 (kV)
(Nozzle 1) 5. 7 (kV)
Excitation V-ref. (Nozzle 2) 11 (0∼19)
(Nozzle 1) 11 (0∼19)
Excitation frequency 68. 9 (kHz) Back

5-4 ●Monitor operational status

5.3 Print without any sensor signal (Test print, Start printing)
(1) Functions
●This function prints by button operation without a print start signal being input.
●In Previous HMI screens, print can also be performed by pressing Start printing from the manual control
menu when in print ready status.
●In New HMI screens, print can also be performed by pressing START PRINTING in print description
screen (New HMI) when in print ready status.

(2) Operation

1 Verify that the printer is in “Standby” state.

Press Test print in the Maintenance menu.
Test print [Ready ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Start printing
Start printing
Printing starts at the press of [Start printing].
Back

2 Press Start printing .

Printing starts.

(Note) Prints repeatedly when the Repeat sensor mode of the User environment setup screen is
“OFF-ON transition” and repeat print is set.
To stop during repeat printing, press the Stop .

●Print without any sensor signal. (Test print, Start printing) 5-5
 5.4 Confirm the registered software
(1) Functions
●Displays the name and version of the registered software.

(2) Operation

1 Press View software version in the Maintenance menu.

View software version [Ready ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

No Software name Version Manual Shutdown

01 Basic software ０１．００
02 Controller software ０１．００ HOME
03 Print controller software M ０１．００
04 Print controller software S ０１．００
05 English ０１．００
06 Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Back

5-6 ●Confirm the registered software

5.5 Checking the functions that can be performed
(1) Functions
●Checks if each function is accessible or protected.
●When protected, the administrator sets protection using the login function beforehand.
●For protected functions, the corresponding operation buttons are not displayed or the corresponding
screens cannot be entered.
●If executable functions are restricted, the names of the corresponding screens will be shaded.

Protected functions
Item Protected function name
●Edit message
●Calendar conditions
Edit message
●Substitution rules setting
●Count conditions

Select message ●Select message

Save message ●Save message

●Print specifications
Print specifications ●Various print setup
●Adjust print parameters
●Print format
Print format
●Adjust inter-character space
[Auxiliary functions] [Environment setup]
●Manage messages/group ●User environment setup
●Create user pattern ●Date/time setup
●Calibrate touch screen coordinates ●Communication environment setup
●Copy data (IJP→USB) ●Touch screen setup
●Copy data (USB→IJP)
Maintenance
●Edit standard pattern [Maintenance work]
●Edit substitution rules ●Operation management
●Select languages ●Excitation V update
●Circulation control
●Solenoid valve/pump test
●Periodic replacement parts mgmt.

Password setup ●Password setup

●Checking the functions which can be performed 5-7

 (2) Operation

1 Press Password protection in the maintenance menu.

The Password protection screen is displayed.

Password protection [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

Manual Startup

Edit message access protect HOME

Select message access protect

Save message access protect

Print specifications access protect

Print format access protect

Maintenance access protect

Password setup access protect

The yellow items are

the setting contents. Back

5-8 ●Checking the functions which can be performed

 6. ENVIRONMENT SETUP
(1) Functions

Item Contents Reference

User environment setup ● Sets the print values. 6.1
● Sets the current time, calendar time and other time
Date/time setup 6.2
information.
Communication ● Sets the serial communication values between Technical Manual
environment setup external device and IJ printer. 5.2
Touch screen setup ● Sets the touch screen values. 6.3
● Changes the user and sets the password for each
Login management 6.4, 6.5
user.

(2) Operation

1 Press Environment setup menu in the Print description screen.

The Environment setup menu screen is displayed

Environment setup menu [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
User environment Communication
Date/time setup
setup environment setup
HOME

Touch screen
Login management
setup

Back

●Environment setup 6-1

6.1 Set the user environment
(1) Functions
● Sets the user environment values.
1 Repeat print sensor mode
● Sets the conditions that print the specified number of times at the specified interval.
signal ON While print target detect sensor signal is ON.
OFF-ON transition When print target detect sensor signal is turned ON once.

● Disabled when Repeat count is "0".

2 Change Character orientation (switching signal mode)

● Sets the forward and reverse character orientation method when performing reverse direction printing.
● The "Change mode" selection menu is different depending on the "Change Character Orientation" set value.
Character orientation by “Change Character Orientation” and “Change mode” combination
Character orientation
Change Character
Change mode Reciprocative printing Reciprocative printing
Orientation
signal : OFF signal : ON
0:ABC(→) 1:ABC(←)
OFF = forward ABC
3: (→) 2:
ABC (←)
Reverse direction printing
1:ABC(←) 0:ABC(→)
OFF = reverse ABC
2: (←) 3:
ABC (→)
0:ABC(→) 2:
ABC (←)
OFF=normal ABC
3: (→) 1:ABC(←)
Normal or inverted ABC
2: (←) 0:ABC(→)
OFF=Inverted
1:ABC(←) 3:
ABC (→)
OFF=normal and 0:ABC(→) 3:
ABC (→)
Character orientation forward 1:ABC(←) 2:
ABC (←)
0 or 3 OFF=inverted
ABC
3: (→) 0:ABC(→)
and reverse ABC
2: (←) 1:ABC(←)

(Example) Assume that the Change Character Orientation is "Reverse direction printing".
● If Change mode is "OFF = forward"
When the reciprocative printing signal is OFF, prints in the forward direction and when the signal is
ON, prints in the reverse direction.

● If Change mode is "OFF = reverse"

When the reciprocative printing signal is OFF, prints in the reverse direction and when the signal is
ON, prints in the forward direction.

For more detail, see "(3)change character orientation (change mode) supplement".

6-2 ●Set the user environment

3 Reverse print
● Set for the print position at character orientation 1 and 3 setting.
Aligns the print position along the right margin when printing line 2 and
right-justified subsequent lines.
(The print position is different for character orientation settings 0 and 2.)
Aligns the print position along the left margin when printing line 2 and
left-justified subsequent lines
(The print position is the same for character orientation settings 0 and 2.)
(Example)
Results when print contents of
[1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0]
[ABC]
are printed in character orientation 1.
1234567890
right-justified
A BC
1234567890
left-justified
ABC
● Columns with items with double width size 5 to 9 set are always printed right-justified.
● This setting functions the same as reciprocating printing reverse direction printing
● Format setup is free layout, it is printed as set the print items.
● When format setup is Right-angled printing, "Reverse print" button is not displayed because
Right-angled is always printed as "left-justified".
4 Print signal type
● Sets whether the IJ printer print output signal is made print.complete or print.-in-progress.
print.complete Output for a fixed time after printing is complete.
print.-in-progress Output while the IJ printer is printing.
5 Print Data Changeover In Progress error
● Sets whether to issue an error or not at print timing while Print data changeover is in progress.
● Error is not issued when set value is "Disabled", setup of Print data recall or Character input are
modified and overlaps print timing.
● If the print target sensor data is input before the print data changeover, error is not issued and the data
prints before the changeover.
Specification of Print Data Changeover In Progress error
Set value of Print Data Changeover In Progress
Function
Disabled Enabled
Print format, Character input(*1),
Fault "Print Data
Calendar condition, Print specification(*2), No error and changeover
Changeover In Progress"
Print data recall
Count condition, Character input
(Character data in count block),
Fault "Invalid Count Data Change Timing"
Switch between Normal ⇔ Inverted
(while count block is existing) (*3)
Adjust print parameters, Save message,
Count reset, Operation management, No error and changeover
Date/time setup(Current time)
User environment setup, Date/time setup
(except current time), Communication
environment setup, Excitation V update, Fault "Invalid Data Change Timing"
Print specification(Speed compensation,
Speed compensation fine control)
(*1) Except character data in count block.
(*2) Except Speed compensation and Speed compensation fine control.
(*3) Except switching character orientation from normal (0 to 1) to inverted (2 to 3) when "count
block" exists.
● When in Ready status, user pattern can not be saved to existing pattern number.
● When in Ready status, the edit standard pattern function can not be run.
●Set the user environment 6-3
 6 Char. Size menu
● Sets the size of the characters used.
● The following can be set:

Char. Size menu 1 5×8, 5×7

Char. Size menu 2 9×8, 9×7

7 Excitation V-ref. warning

● When the current ambient temperature and the standard ambient temperature (ambient temperature
when Excitation V-ref. value was updated) exceeds a certain level, the alarm "Excitation V-ref. Review"
occurs. This setting enables/disables that function.
● Setup of enable/disable differs depending on the ink type.

8 Print start adjust mode

● This function enables you to suppress the displacement of "Print start positions" of the two nozzles.

＜˝Print start adjust mode˝ is set to ˝Disable˝.＞

Nozzle 2

Nozzle 1

First print Second print Third print

＜˝Print start adjust mode˝ is set to ˝Enable˝.＞

Nozzle 2

Nozzle 1

First print Second print Third print

● Refer to "6.1.(4) Supplement to Print start adjust mode".

9 QR Code printing
● The direction of the print of the QR code / Micro QR code is set. Please refer to the Technial
manual "9. APPENDIX Barcode, 2-dimensional code" ( 9-4) for details.

6-4 ●Set the user environment

(2) Operation
1 Press User environment setup in the environment setup menu.
User environment setup [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink
Repeat print sensor mode signal ON OFF-ON transition
Change Character orientation Reverse direction printing Manual Startup

Change mode OFF=forward (ABC)

HOME
Reverse print right-justified left-justified

Print signal type print. complete print. -in-progress

Print data changeover error Disable Enable

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Char. Size menu 1 5×8 5×7
Char. Size menu 2 9×8 9×7
Excitation V-ref. warning Disable Enable

Print start adjust mode Disable Enable

Back

(2nd screen)
User environment setup [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

Manual Startup

HOME
QR Code printing 180-degree rotation Normal

Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Back

●Set the user environment 6-5

 (3) Change character orientation (Change mode) supplement
● The character orientation at reciprocative printing signal input is different depending on the "Change
Character orientation" and "Change mode" set values. See the table below.
Reciprocative printing signal and character orientation
(When "Change Character orientation" = "Reverse direction printing")
Character Reciprocative printing signal
Change mode
orientation OFF ON

0:ABC(→)

1:ABC(←)
Order of printing Order of printing
OFF = forward
ABC
2: (←)

3:ABC (→)
Order of printing Order of printing

0:ABC(→)

1:ABC(←)
Order of printing Order of printing
OFF=reverse
ABC
2: (←)

ABC
3: (→)
Order of printing Order of printing

6-6 ●Set the user environment

 Reciprocative printing signal and Character orientation
(When "Change Character Orientation" = "Normal and inverted")
Character Reciprocative printing signal
Change mode
orientation OFF ON

0:ABC(→)

ABC
2: (←)
Order of printing Order of printing
OFF=normal
1:ABC(←)

3: ABC
(→)
Order of printing Order of printing

0:ABC(→)

ABC
2: (←)
Order of printing Order of printing
OFF=inverted
1:ABC(←)

ABC
3: (→)
Order of printing Order of printing

●Set the user environment 6-7

 Reciprocative printing signal and Character orientation
(When "Change Character Orientation" = "Character orientation 0 or 3")
Character Reciprocative printing signal
Change mode
orientation OFF ON

0:ABC(→)

3: ABC
(→)
OFF=normal and Order of printing Order of printing
forward
2: (←)
ABC

1:ABC(←)
Order of printing
Order of printing

0:ABC(→)

3: ABC
(→)
OFF=inverted and Order of printing Order of printing
reverse
2: ABC
(←)

1:ABC(←)
Order of printing Order of printing

6-8 ●Set the user environment

● Operation examples
(Example) Examples of printing "ABC" onto trapezoidal print material

1 Change Character Orientation : "Reverse direction printing"

Change mode : "OFF = forward"

Reciprocative
ABC
ABC
printing signal : OFF order of printing order of printing

Direction of transport

Direction of transport
Reciprocative ABC ABC
printing signal : ON order of printing order of printing

Reciprocative ABC
ABC
printing signal : OFF
order of printing order of printing

2 Change Character Orientation : "Normal or inverted"

Change mode : "OFF = normal"

Reciprocative ABC
printing signal : OFF
ABC
order of printing order of printing
Direction of transport

Direction of transport
Reciprocative ABC
printing signal : ON
ABC
order of printing order of printing

Reciprocative ABC
printing signal : OFF ABC
order of printing order of printing

3 Change Character Orientation : "Character orientation 0 or 3"

Change mode : "OFF = normal and forward"
Direction of transport

ABC
ABC ABC
order of printing order of printing order of printing

Reciprocative Reciprocative Reciprocative

printing signal : OFF printing signal : ON printing signal : OFF

Direction of transport
ABC
ABC ABC
order of printing order of printing order of printing

Reciprocative Reciprocative Reciprocative

printing signal : OFF printing signal : ON printing signal : OFF

●Set the user environment 6-9

 ● When IJ Printer is "Ready", if you change the print data while "Change Character orientation" is being set,
please be aware that there may be issued "Print Data Changeover Error T".

"Print Data Changeover Error T" is the error which occurs if there is a data collision between the print data
change processing made by "Change Character orientation" and the screen transition processing or the
print data changeover made by External communication. This is the error with which the ink ejection will
not stop, and therefore if the error occurs, you can continue printing by pressing "Close" button on error
message screen.

● When "Nozzle-Space Alignment" is set to "Close up" or "Spread" and when "Change Character
orientation" is set to "Normal or Inverted" or "Character orientation 0 or 3", Character height set value will
NOT be applied by print even Character orientation is inverted on print. Please see figures right below.

<< “Close up” or “Spread” is used.>>

<Image on screen> <Printed image>
90
90

50 50

Character height is NOT applied by print.

<<Either “Close up” or “Spread” is NOT used. (Normal operation)>>

<Image on screen> <Printed image>

50
90

50
90

Character height is applied by print.

[Legend]
90 50 ：Character height set values
：Char. height-applied destination

6-10 ●Set the user environment

(4) Supplement to Print start adjust mode
1 Requirements for Print start adjust mode
● When all the conditions 1 through 5 are met, the displacement of "Print start positions" of the two
nozzles can be reduced.

No. Setup items Requirements

1 Print start adjust mode Enabled
2 One scan time * The same value shall be set on both nozzles
3 Product speed matching None or Encoder
4 Pulse rate div. Factor The same value shall be set on both nozzles
5 Target sensor filter Until end of print
* Refer to Technical Manual, "4.3.1.(4) Relationship between print object detection signal and
printing operation" for "One scan time".
● When Requirements for Print start adjust mode are not met, the normal printing will be performed.

2 Icon indication when Requirements for Print start adjust mode are met.
● The background color of "Printing method" on "Print description" screen will turn to yellow.

Print description [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0
Message name[ ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋

Twin

1 2

Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink

The background color is yellow.
Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
Print count １０００(prints) Print count
reset
Ink pressure 2 : ０．２６０
Ink pressure 1 : ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

message Menu
message message parameters management

Print description screen

3 Precautions for use

● This function is not the function to automatically adjust "Print start positions" of the two nozzles
but suppresses the displacement of "Print start positions" of the two nozzles. Therefore, it is
necessary to adjust manually the displacement of "Print start positions" of the two nozzles.
Please refer to Technical Manual, " 9. Appendix ● Adjustment Procedures for "Composite
Characters" ".
● When printing with this function, please ensure that the print object detection signal is being used.
Print start by the button on screen, such as "Start printing" button in "Manual Control Menu"
dialogue box, the displacement of "Print start positions" of the two nozzles could be found.
● When "Print start adjust mode" is set to "Enable", please be sure not to change the print data when
the printer is in "Ready" state. Should the data be changed, "Print Data Changeover Error T" will
occur and you are not able to edit Character width nor Pulse rate div. Factor on "Adjust print
parameters" screen.

●Set the user environment 6-11

6.2 Set the date and time
(1) Functions
●Sets the date and time values.
Setting item Contents Default
Current time ● Changes the current time (clock function). -
● Sets whether the calendar time is the same as the current
time or is stopped.
● Makes the time of "Clock"
same as current displayed at the upper right-hand
time corner of the screen the calendar
time.
● Makes an arbitrarily set time the same as
Calendar time control
calendar time. current time
● The "Clock" (current time) at the
clock stop upper right-hand corner of the
screen is not stopped.
● A time ahead of the current time
cannot be set.

● Sets the calendar time

● Calendar character will be printed based on "calendar
Calendar time time". -
● This can be set only when Calendar time control is "clock
stop".
●Sets 24-hour clock or 12-hour clock.
2 24-hour clock 00:00 to 23:59. 24-hour
Clock system A.M. 00:00 to 11:59
12-hour clock clock
P.M. 00:00 to 11:59

(Note) When setting the substitution rules to year, select "clock stop" and do not set the past year
instead of the current year. When set, a space is substituted for year.

(2) Operation

1 Press Date/time setup in the environment setup menu.

Date/time setup [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink
Current time ２０１8 (year) 䠌 䠓 (month) 䠌 䠓 (day)
䠍 䠎 (hour) 䠐 䠑 (minute) 䠐 䠑 (second) Manual Startup

Calendar time control same as current time clock stop

Apply HOME
Calendar time ２０１8 (year) ０７(month) ０７(day)
１２(hour) ４５(minute) ４５(second)

Clock system 24-hour clock 12-hour clock

Cancel
●Press OK to apply the date/time setup.
●The current time affects the clock display only
when changes are made.
●Calendar character will be printed based on "calendar time".
OK

6-12 ●Sets the date and time

6.3 Set up the touch screen
(1) Functions
● Sets the touch screen environment values.

Setting item Contents Default

●Specifies the time the touch screen is turned on.
Touch screen is turned off if there is
OFF in 3 min.
no panel input within 3 minutes.
Touch screen is turned off if there is
OFF in 30 min.
Display no panel input within 30 minutes. OFF in 3 min.
Always on Always on
[Note] When turn "OFF in 30 min." and "Always on" were
set, the brightness will decrease as the on time
accumulates.
●Changes the keyboard layout.
ABC ABC layout
QWERTY Layout generally used with PC, etc.

A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
Keyboard layout U V W X Y Z ABC
ABC layout

Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L
Z X C V B N M
QWERTY layout

Icon display ● For some buttons, icon display or icon hide is set. Enable
● Selects the date format of the clock (current time)
displayed at the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
● This can be set only when Calendar time control is "clock
stop".
Clock display format YYYY. MM. DD
YYYY. MM. DD Display in year.month.day order
DD. MM. YYYY Display in day.month.year order
MM. DD. YYYY Display in month.day.year order

●When the Startup and Shutdown

Startup
button or a
Shutdown

button in the Manual Control menu M was pressed,

Manual

confirmation message display or nondisplay is set.

However, a confirmation message is never displayed even
Confirmation if the Start Printing button in the Manual Control menu is
window for Manual Display
pressed.
Control Menu
Display Displays a confirmation window.
Does not display a confirmation
Non display
window.

● Sets the direction of cursor movement when in Arabic

Arabic input method To the left
input mode.

●Set up the touch screen 6-13

 Setting item Contents Default
● Displayed when the administrator is logged in.
● The screen display [HMI] used by general users can be
set to new system screen or conventional screen.
Previous : The conventional HMI screens will be
displayed.
New : The general user can have an access only to
the following eleven screens.
Human Machine Print description(HOME),
interface Open(OPEN), Save(SAVE), New HMI
[HMI] Adjust print parameters(ADJUST),
Edit[Input](EDIT),
Edit[Size & Intervals](EDIT),
Edit[Adjustment Plus](EDIT),
EDIT[Speed Adjustment](EDIT),
EDIT[Time & Other](EDIT),
Operation management(SETTING),
Select login user(LOGIN)

(2) Operation

1 Press Touch screen setup in the environment setup menu.

Touch screen setup [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Display OFF in 3 min.

Keyboard layout ABC QWERTY
ICON Display Disable Enable
Clock display format YYYY.MM.DD

Confirmation window for Manual Control Menu Display Non display

Arabic input method to the left to the right

Back

6-14 ●Set up the touch screen

6.4 Changing the login user
(1) Functions
● Logs in again as a different user from currently logged in user.
● When logging in, selects the user and inputs the password.
● The administrator defines the user name and password and password protection setting in advance.
The password protection setting can be changed for each user beforehand. See the Technical Manual.
● When the administrator sets the login procedure necessary at power-on, the login user is selected at
power-on.
● The login history for the last 30 times is displayed on the login history screen.
Please change the password periodically.

(2) Operation
(a) New HMI
1 Press menu LOGIN .
The Select login user screen is displayed.
This icon shows "Administrator". This icon shows "User".
Select login user × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Current User ID：user9

admin user2 user3

user4 user5 User6

user7 user8 user9

The saved user
name is displayed.

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

2 Press user name user2 .

A password input window opens.
Select login user × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Current User ID：user9

Input the password of The window

admin user2 user3
user name “user2”. will close.
Password ×

admin04 user05 7
admin06 8 9 Back space
Q W E R T Y U I O P × 4 5 6
A S user07
D F G Hadmin08
J K L Enter 1 2 3
Aa Z X C V B N M 0
Enter

Shift
Cursor

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

Enter
3 Enter the password of user name "user2", and press Enter .
Logs in again using user name "user2" and the touch screen return to the Print description screen
(HOME).
●Changing the login user 6-15
 (b) Previous HMI

1 Press Login management in the environment setup menu.

The Login management menu is displayed.

Login management menu [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Displays the Makeup Ink

history of
logged in
Manual Startup
users.
Login history Select login user Password setup
HOME

Select login Sets the password.

User conditions Using environment
user setup setup
However, it is not
displayed when
Conditions authorization is not
setup given from the
Create new User ID Delete User ID
administrator.

New user ID
create Select the login
method.
Back

2 Press Select login user .

The Select login user screen is displayed.

Select login user [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Current user ID : user9

The user ID currently
logged in is displayed.

admin user2 user3

The saved user

name is displayed.
user4 user5 user6

user7 user8 user9

Back

6-16 ●Changing the login user

3 Press user name user2 .
A password input window opens.

Select login user [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Current user ID : user9

admin user2 user3

Cancel
← → Enter
User4 User5 User6 Enter
Inputs the password Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ ABC
of user name "user2". Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ 123 Delete
User7 User8 User9
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ Change Change

Back

4 Enter the password of user name “user2”, and press Enter Enter .
Logs in again using user name "user2" and the touch screen returns to the Login management menu.

5 Press Login history in the Login management menu.

A history of logged in users is displayed.
ID No. user name
Login history [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

Login history
No Date / time user name Manual Startup
20 2018/07/07 12:40 2 user2
19 2018/07/07 08:15 9 user9 HOME
Can be sorted in 18 2018/07/06 09:10 2 user2
ascending or 17 2018/07/05 10:05 1 admin
descending order. 16 2018/07/04 08:15 9 user9
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

Back

●Changing the login user 6-17

6.5 Setting password for each user
(1) Functions
● User sets their own password.
● However, when the user was defined by the administrator, and the password setting is protected, the password
change screen is not displayed.
● A password must be entered when logging in.
● Make the password 12 characters or less.
Please change the password periodically.

(2) Operation
1 Press Login management in the environment setup menu.
The Login management menu is displayed.

Login management menu [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Displays the Makeup Ink

history of
logged in Manual Startup
users.
Login history Select login user Password setup
HOME

Select login Sets the password.

user However, it is not
displayed when
authorization is not
given from the
administrator.

Back

2 Press Password setup .

The Password setup screen is displayed.
Password setup [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Old password

New password
HOME
New password reentry Input the old password.
Not displayed when the
password is not set.

Input the new password.

Cancel

OK OK

3 Enter "Old password", "New password", and "New password reentry".

4 Press OK .

6-18 ●Setting password for each user

 7 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
(1) Functions

Item Contents Reference

●Performs message name change, deletion, save number
Manage messages 7.1
change, and group change of saved messages.
●Performs group name change, group deletion and group
Manage group number change of group which classifies and manages mes- 7.2
sages.
Create user pattern ●Creates and edits user patterns (saved characters). 7.3
Calibrate touch screen
●Corrects touch screen and screen coordinate position offset. 7.4
coordinates
Copy data (IJP→USB) ●Backs up message and user pattern to USB. 7.5
Copy data (USB→IJP) ●Copies backed up data to IJ printer. 7.5
Edit standard pattern ●Edits standard patterns. 7.6
Edit substitution rules ●Edits calendar substitution rules. 7.7
Selecting languages ●Changes the display language. 7.8

(2) Operation

1 Press Auxiliary function in the Print description screen.

The Auxiliary function menu screen is displayed

Aux. function menu [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Manage messages / Create user Calibrate touch
Group pattern screen coordinates HOME

Copy data Copy data Edit Standard

（ＩＪＰ → ＵＳＢ） （ＵＳＢ → ＩＪＰ） pattern

Edit substitution
Select Languages
rule

Back

●Auxiliary functions 7-1

7.1 Manage messages
7.1.1 Managing stored messages
(1) Functions
Message management functions
Item Contents Reference
Change message name ●Changes the message name of stored messages. 7.1.2
Delete Stored message ●Deletes stored messages. 7.1.3
Change message number ●Changes the stored number of stored messages. 7.1.4
Change group ●Changes the group of stored messages. 7.1.5
●The print image of the registered print data can be
Preview 7.1.6
checked.
●Do not turn off the printer during the Message management procedure.
Message selection methods
Item Contents
Normal ●One message can be selected.
Multiple ●Multiple messages can be selected.
●Two items in the message name list can be specified and the messages
Area
within that area can be selected.
●For “Multiple” and “Area”, the Change message name and Change message number functions cannot be started.
(2) Operation
1 Press Manage messages / Group in the auxiliary functions menu.
The Manage messages screen is displayed.
● Preview is not displayed on the following screens.
Group Sort Switches the message selection method.

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No△ No△
Message name Message name
Select page
Search conditions １ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
Select page
input ２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２
1/1 Details or Simple list
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
Dis- De-
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４ play tails
All

Preview

Display All

Change mes- Delete Sto- Change mes- Change group

Manage group
sage name red message sage number Back

Message management functions Manage group

2 Switch the selection method of the objective message.

3 After selecting the message name of the objective message, press

Change message name , Delete Stored message , Change message number , or
Change group .
The screen of each function is displayed.
7-2 ●Manage messages
(3) Message selection method
1 Normal
See the previous item for a screen example.

2 Multiple
Multiple

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name
１ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
Select page
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２
1/1
The message of an ３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
De-
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４
arbitrary position can tails

be selected.

Delete Sto- Change group Manage group

red message Back

The Delete Stored message and Change group functions can be started.

3 Area
Area

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor- Multi Area
mal ple
HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name
１ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ Select page
1/1
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
The beginning and De-
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４
end can be specified tails

and the messages in

that area can be
selected.

Delete Sto- Change group Manage group

red message Back

The Delete Stored message and Change group functions can be started.

●Manage messages 7-3

 7.1.2 Changing the message name
(1) Functions
●Changes the message name of a saved message.

(2) Operation
The Manage messages screen is displayed.

1 Set Normal selection mode and select the message.

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name
１ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
Select page
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２
1/1
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
Dis- De-
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４ play tails
All Normal

Change mes- Delete Sto- Change mes- Change group

Manage group
sage name red message sage number Back

Change message name

2 Press Change message name .

The Change message name screen is displayed.

Change message name [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

New message name Current message name ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１

Manual Startup
New message name ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１

HOME

Cancel

OK

OK
3 Press New message name .
A keyboard is displayed.

4 Input the new message name and press Enter Enter .

5 Press OK .
The message name is changed.
7-4 ●Manage messages
7.1.3 Deleting stored messages
(1) Functions
●Deletes stored messages.

(2) Operation
The Manage messages screen is displayed.

1 Select the message.

Switches the message selection method.

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name
１ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ Select page
1/1
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
Dis- De-
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４ play tails
All

Change mes- Delete Sto- Change mes- Change group

Manage group
sage name red message sage number Back

Delete Stored message

2 Press Delete Stored message .

A Delete Saved Message Confirmation message is displayed.

＝＝＝＝＝ Delete Stored Message Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

Print data "ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ " will be deleted.

OK Cancel

OK

3 Press OK .
The message is deleted.

●Manage messages 7-5

 7.1.4 Changing message number
(1) Functions
●Changes the stored number of a stored message.
●Specifies two messages and exchanges stored numbers.
● Group number is assigned to a message name.

(2) Operation
The Manage messages screen is displayed.

1 Set Normal selection mode and select the message name.

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name
Selects the message １ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
Select page
whose saved number ２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２
1/1
is to be changed. ３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
Dis- De-
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４ play
All
tails Normal

Change mes- Delete Sto- Change mes- Change group

Manage group
sage name red message sage number Back

Change message number

7-6 ●Manage messages

2 Select the first message and press Change message number .
The screen that selects the 2nd message is displayed.
At this time, all the messages are displayed.

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]
Search condition [ ] Nor- Manual Startup

mal
Select the move destination HOME

No△ Message name No△ Message name

1st message １ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４ Select page
1/1
Selects the De-
tails
2nd message.
Free
number
Free number
Cancel
Change mes-
sage number

To select a number without a message saved, press Free number .

All the numbers are displayed.

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor-
mal
Select the move destination. HOME

No Message name No Message name

１ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１ １１
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ １２
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３ １３ Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.

４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４ １４ Select page

1/1
５ １５
６ １６ De-
tails
７ １７
８ １８ Free
number
９ １９
１０ ２０
Cancel

Change mes-
sage number

●Manage messages 7-7

 3 Select the 2nd message.
Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]
Search condition [ ] Nor- Manual Startup
mal
Two message number will be swapped. HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name
1st message １ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４ Select page
2nd message 1/1

De-
tails
Free
number

Cancel
Change mes-
sage number
OK OK

4 Press OK .
The message stored number is changed.

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor- Multi
mal ple Area HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name
１ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ Select page
1/1
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
Dis- De-
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４ play tails
All

Change mes- Delete Sto- Change mes- Change group

Manage group
sage name red message sage number Back

7-8 ●Manage messages

7.1.5 Changing the group to which a message belongs
(1) Functions
●Changes the group to which a stored message belongs.

(2) Operation
The Manage messages screen is displayed.

1 Select the message.

Switches the message selection method.

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name
１ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ Select page
1/1
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
Dis- De-
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４ play tails
All

Change mes- Delete Sto- Change mes- Change group

Manage group
sage name red message sage number Back

Change group
2

2 Press Change group .

A group list window opens.

3 Specify the group.

The specified group is displayed in yellow.

Group Group name

０ undefined
Group after change １ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１
２ ＧＲＯＵＰ００２
３ ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
４ ＧＲＯＵＰ００４
５ ＧＲＯＵＰ００５
６ ＧＲＯＵＰ００６
Group before change ７ ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ OK
OK
８ ＧＲＯＵＰ００８
９ ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ Cancel

4 Press OK .
The group is changed.

●Manage messages 7-9

 7.1.6 Checking the print image of registered print data
(1) Functions
●The print image of registered print data can be checked.
●The print content currently being printed is not affected.

(2) Operation
The Manage messages screen is displayed.

1 Set Normal selection mode and select the message.

Manage messages [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0

Message name[ ] Makeup Ink

Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

Nor Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No△ Message name No△ Message name
１ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２ Select page
Selects the print data 1/1
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
whose print image is ４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４
Dis- De-
play
to be displayed. ５ All
tails Preview
１０ Preview
１１
１２
１３
１４

Change mes- Delete Sto- Change mes-

Change group Manage group
sage name red message sage number Back

2 Press Preview .
The print image of the selected print data is displayed.

Manage messages [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ ] Makeup Ink
Group No. 00 Group name [ ]

Search condition [ ] Manual Startup

− ＋ HOME
No ニックネーム No ニックネーム
１ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０１
２ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０２
３ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０３
４ ＳＡＭＰＬＥ０４
Preview

Change mes- Delete Sto- Change mes- Change group

Manage group
sage name red message sage number Cancel

7-10 ●Manage messages

7.2 Manage group
7.2.1 Manage group
(1) Functions Message management functions
Item Contents Reference
●Changes a group name.
Change/create group name 7.2.2
●Inputs a new group name.
Delete group ●Deletes a group and the messages belonging to that group. 7.2.3
●Changes the group number.
Change group number ●At messages belonging to that group, the group number is 7.2.4
changed and the group name is not changed

Group selection methods

Item Contents
Normal ●One group can be selected.
Multiple ●Multiple groups can be selected.
●Two items of the group list can be specified and the groups within that area
Area
can be selected.

● For “Multiple” and “Area”, the Change/create group name and Change group number functions cannot be
started.

1
(2) Operation
1 Press Manage group in the Manage messages screen.
The Manage group screen is displayed.

Switches the message selection method.

Manage group [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No Group name No Group name
１ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ １１ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１１
２ ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ １２ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１２ Select page
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
３ ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ １３ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１３
４ ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ １４ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１４ Select page
1/5
５ ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ １５ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１５
６ ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ １６ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１６
７ ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ １７ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１７
８ ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ １８ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１８
９ ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ １９ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１９
１０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１０ ２０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０２０

Change/
create Delete group Change Manage
group name group number messages Back

Each function of group management Manage messages

2 Switch the selection method of the objective group.

3 After selecting the objective group, press Change/create group name ,

Delete group , or Change group number .
The screen of each function is displayed.

●Manage group 7-11

 7.2.2 Change group name
(1) Functions
●Changes a group name.
●Inputs a new group name.

(2) Operation
The Manage group screen is displayed.
1 Set the Normal selection mode and select the group.

Manage group [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No Group name No Group name
１ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ １１ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１１
２ ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ １２ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１２ Normal
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
３ ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ １３ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１３
４ ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ １４ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１４ Select page
1/5
５ ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ １５ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１５
６ ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ １６ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１６
７ ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ １７ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１７
８ ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ １８ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１８
９ ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ １９ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１９
１０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１０ ２０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０２０

Change/
create Delete group Change Manage
group name group number messages Back

Change/create group name

2 Press Change/create group name .

Change group name screen is displayed.

Manage group [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

New group name Current group name ＧＲＯＵＰ００１

Manual Startup
New group name ＳＡＭＰ
ＧＬＥＯＵ
Ｒ０１Ｐ００１

HOME

Cancel

OK
OK

3 Press New group name .

A keyboard is displayed.

4 Input the new group name and press Enter Enter .

5 Press OK .
The group name is changed.
7-12 ●Manage group
7.2.3 Delete a stored group
(1) Functions
●Deletes a group and the messages belonging to that group.

(2) Operation
The Manage group screen is displayed.

1 Select a group.
Switches the message selection method.

Manage group [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No Group name No Group name
１ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ １１ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１１
２ ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ １２ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１２
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
３ ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ １３ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１３
４ ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ １４ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１４ Select page
1/5
５ ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ １５ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１５
６ ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ １６ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１６
７ ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ １７ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１７
８ ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ １８ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１８
９ ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ １９ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１９
１０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１０ ２０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０２０

Change/
create Delete group Change Manage
group name group number messages Back

Delete group

2 Press Delete group .

A Delete Stored Group Confirmation message is displayed.

＝＝＝＝＝ Delete Stored Group Confirmation ＝＝＝＝＝

Group "ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ " will be deleted.

Also, all messages that belong to the group will be deleted.

OK Cancel

OK

3 Press OK .
The group and the messages belonging to that group are deleted.

●Manage group 7-13

 7.2.4 Change group number
(1) Functions
●Changes a group number.
●Specifies 2 groups and exchanges the group numbers.
●At the messages belonging to that group, the group number is changed and the group name is not changed.

(2) Operation
The Manage group screen is displayed.

1 Set Normal selection mode and select a group.

Manage group [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No Group name No Group name
Selects the group whose １ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ １１ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１１
saved number is to be ２ ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ １２ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１２
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
３ ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ １３ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１３
changed. Select page
４ ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ １４ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１４
５ ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ １５ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１５
1/5 Normal
６ ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ １６ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１６
７ ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ １７ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１７
８ ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ １８ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１８
９ ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ １９ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１９
１０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１０ ２０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０２０

Change/
create Delete group Change Manage
group name group number messages Back

Change group number

2 Select the 1st group and press Change group number .

The screen that selects the 2nd group is displayed.

Manage group [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Nor-
mal
Select the move destination. HOME
No Group name No Group name
1st group １ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ １１ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１１
２ ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ １２ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１２
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
３ ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ １３ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１３
４ ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ １４ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１４ Select page
1/5
Selects the 2nd group. ５ ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ １５ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１５
６ ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ １６ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１６
７ ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ １７ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１７
８ ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ １８ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１８
９ ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ １９ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１９
１０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１０ ２０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０２０
Cancel

Change
group number

7-14 ●Manage group

3 Select the 2nd group.

Manage group [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Nor-
mal
Two group numbers will be swapped. HOME
No Group name No Group name
1st group １ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ １１ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１１
２ ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ １２ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１２
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
３ ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ １３ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１３
４ ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ １４ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１４ Select page
2nd group. 1/5
５ ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ １５ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１５
６ ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ １６ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１６
７ ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ １７ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１７
８ ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ １８ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１８
９ ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ １９ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１９
１０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１０ ２０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０２０
Cancel
Change
group number
OK OK

4 Press OK .
The saved number of the group is changed.

Manage group [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Nor- Multi
mal ple Area
HOME
No Group name No Group name
１ ＧＲＯＵＰ００３ １１ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１１
２ ＧＲＯＵＰ００２ １２ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１２
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
３ ＧＲＯＵＰ００１ １３ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１３
４ ＧＲＯＵＰ００４ １４ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１４ Select page
1/5
５ ＧＲＯＵＰ００５ １５ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１５
６ ＧＲＯＵＰ００６ １６ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１６
７ ＧＲＯＵＰ００７ １７ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１７
８ ＧＲＯＵＰ００８ １８ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１８
９ ＧＲＯＵＰ００９ １９ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１９
１０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０１０ ２０ ＧＲＯＵＰ０２０

Change/
create Delete group Change Manage
group name group number messages Back

●Manage group 7-15

 7.3 Creating a user pattern
7.3.1 Creating and saving user pattern
(1) Functions
●Creates a user pattern.
●Fixed size decides the horizontal dots and vertical dots according to the dot matrix.
●Free size allows creation of an arbitrarily sized pattern within horizontal 320 dots x vertical 32 dots.
●Shows the number of characters which can be created.
UX-D8
Fixed size 200 messages (each dot matrix)
Free size 50 messages

(2) Operation

1 Press Create user pattern in the auxiliary functions menu.

The Create user pattern screen is displayed.
The 2 red frames display the same area.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

Manual Startup
Dot pattern creation area
HOME

Create/Edit

Dot matrix Horizontal dot Fixed Free Select Save

Dot matrix 5x8
Inter-char. space Inter-char. space 3 Back

7-16 ●Creating a user pattern

2 Set the dot matrix and inter-character space.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

Manual Startup

HOME

Create/Edit Create/Edit
Horizontal dot Fixed Free Select Save

Dot matrix 12x16

Inter-char. space 4 Back

3 Press Create/Edit .
The Create/Edit screen is displayed.
Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Pattern [ ]

▲ Pattern size Manual Startup

Hor. ［ 16］
△ Vert.［ 16］ HOME
Cursor
position
Hor. ［ 1］
Vert.［ 1］

▽ Zoom

×1 Changes the display

▼
magnification
《 〈 〉 》 Clear (X0.5, X1, X2, X4).
Select Save

Rec- Rec-
Dupli- Paste Move Clear Invert tangle tangle
cate area fill Back

●Creating a user pattern 7-17

 4 Set Zoom and change the display magnification of the dot pattern creation area.
The display magnification of the dot pattern creation area changes.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

▲ Pattern size Manual Startup

Hor. ［ 16］
△ Vert.［ 16］ HOME
Cursor
position
Hor. ［ 1］
Vert.［ 1］

▽ Zoom

×2
▼

《 〈 〉 》 Clear

Select Save

Rec- Rec-
Dupli- Paste Move Clear Invert tangle tangle
cate area fill Back

5 Create a pattern at the dot pattern creation area. When touched directly, the dot
shading is reversed.

Create user pattern [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0
Scroll up
[ ]
8 dots
Pattern

▲ 1 dot
Pattern size Manual Startup
Hor. ［ 16］
△ Vert.［ 16］ HOME

Dot shading of Cursor

position
touched position Hor. ［ 8］
is reversed. Scroll down
Vert.［ 3］
1 dot
▽ Zoom 8 dots
×2
▼
Clears the
《 〈 〉 》 Clear
pattern dots
Select Save
Scroll left
<< 8 dots Dupli- Clear Rec- Rec- Save
Paste Move Invert tangle tangle
< 1 dot cate area fill Back

When a dot was

Draws a graphic. (See 7.3.3.) Scroll rigth reversed by
> 1 dot touching it directly,
>> 8 dots make the display
magnification
quadruple.

7-18 ●Creating a user pattern

6 Press Save .
The save screen is displayed.
When the save destination is specified the saved destination code
and pattern are displayed.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

Dot matrix 12x16 Manual Startup

HOME

Page count
Stored destination 1/6
pattern [000]

Touch the position ★◎△

Logo

on the keyboard to
be saved.
Cancel

Press to display
the next screen.
− OK OK
Change Change

7 Press OK .
The pattern is saved.

●Creating a user pattern 7-19

 7.3.2 Selecting a user pattern
(1) Functions
●Selects a saved user pattern at the “Create user pattern” screen.

(2) Operation
The Create user pattern screen or Create/edit screen is displayed.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Pattern [ ]

▲ Pattern size Manual Startup

Hor. ［ 16］
△ Vert.［ 16］ HOME
Cursor
position
Hor. ［ 1］
Vert.［ 1］

▽ Zoom

×1
▼
Select
《 〈 〉 》 Clear

Select Save

Rec- Rec-
Dupli- Paste Move Clear Invert tangle tangle
cate area fill Back

1 Press Select .
The select screen is displayed.
Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Pattern [ ]

Dot matrix 12x16 Manual Startup

HOME

Selects the kind

of character.

123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△ etc. ▽

Logo

Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ

Selects the character Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ Cancel

to be selected. Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ

Change Change
Space OK OK

2 Select the character from user pattern, letters, numbers, and symbols, and press
OK .
The pattern is selected.

7-20 ●Creating a user pattern

7.3.3 Editing a pattern
(1) Functions
Name Function
Duplicate, Paste ●Duplicates the pattern of the selected range and pastes it to an arbitrary position.
Move ●Moves the pattern of the selected range.
Clear area ●Clears the pattern of the selected area.
Invert ●Inverts the pattern of the selected area.
Rectangle ●Draws a rectangle at the selected position.
Rectangle fill ●Draws a rectangle at the selected positions and fills its interior.
Paste pattern ●Duplicates the user pattern, pattern of alphabetic, numeric or symbol and pastes
(When editing free size) it to an arbitrary position.

(2) Operation
The Create/Edit screen is displayed.

1 Press Rectangle .
The screen that selects the start point is displayed.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

▲ Pattern size Manual Startup

Hor. ［ 16］
△ Vert.［ 16］ HOME
Cursor
position
Hor. ［ 1］
Vert.［ 1］

▽ Zoom

×2
▼

《 〈 〉 》
Decide the position and press [Start].

Rec- Rec-
Dupli- Paste Move Clear Invert tangle Start
cate area tangle Cancel
fill

Rectangle Start

2 Touch the point from which drawing of the rectangle is to start.

The X mark moves to the touched position.

3 Press Start .
The start position is indicated by a red X.
The screen that specifies the end point is displayed.

●Creating a user pattern 7-21

 4 Touch the point at which drawing of the rectangle is to end.
The X mark moves to the touched position.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Pattern [ ]

End position
▲ Pattern size Manual Startup

Hor. ［ 16］
△ Vert.［ 16］ HOME
Cursor
position
Hor. ［ 16］
Vert.［ 16］

▽ Zoom

×2
▼
Start position
《 〈 〉 》
Decide the position and press [End].

Rec- Rec-
Dupli- Paste Move Clear Invert tangle Start
cate area tangle Cancel
fill

End

5 Press End .
The Area of the rectangle with the start position and end position at opposing corners is displayed in red.
The screen that selects the end point is displayed.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

▲ Pattern size Manual Startup

Hor. ［ 16］
△ Vert.［ 16］ HOME
Cursor
position
Hor. ［ 16］
Vert.［ 16］

▽ Zoom

×2
▼

《 〈 〉 》
After completing the check, press [Apply].

Rec- Rec-
Dupli- Paste Move Clear Invert tangle Start
cate area tangle Cancel
fill

Apply

7-22 ●Creating a user pattern

6 Press Apply .
A rectangle pattern is drawn.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

▲ Pattern size Manual Startup

Hor. ［ 16］
△ Vert.［ 16］ HOME
Cursor
position
Hor. ［ 16］
Vert.［ 16］

▽ Zoom

×2
▼

《 〈 〉 》 Clear

Select Save

Rec- Rec-
Dupli- Paste Move Clear Invert tangle tangle
cate area fill Back

●Creating a user pattern 7-23

 7.3.4 Creating a user pattern of a free size
(1) Functions
●Creates a user pattern of an arbitrary size.
●The maximum size is horizontal 320 dots x vertical 32 dots.

(2) Operation
The Create user pattern screen is displayed.

1 Select Horizontal dot “Free”.

A free size Create user pattern screen is displayed.
The 2 red frames display the same area.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

Manual Startup

HOME

《 〈 〉 》 Create/Edit

Horizontal dot Fixed Free

Select Save
Vertical size
Vertical size 01 （1∼32）

Horizontal size Horizontal size 001 （1∼320） Back

2 Input the vertical dot size and horizontal dot size.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

Manual Startup

HOME

《 〈 〉 》 Create/Edit Create/Edit
Horizontal dot Fixed Free
Select Save
Vertical size 16 （1∼32）

Horizontal size 032 （1∼320） Back

3 Press Create/Edit .
The Create/Edit screen is displayed.

7-24 ●Creating a user pattern

4 Create a pattern at the dot pattern creation area. When touched directly, the dot is
inverted.
Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Pattern [ ]
Scroll up
8 dots
▲ Pattern size Manual Startup 1 dot
Hor. ［ 32］
△ HOME
Inverts the dot Vert.［ 16］
Cursor
of the touched position
position. Hor. ［ 9］
Vert.［ 12］
Scroll down
1 dot
▽ Zoom 8 dots
×1
▼
Clears the dots of
《 〈 〉 》 Clear
the pattern.
Select Save
Scroll left
<< 8 dots Dupli- Clear Rec- Rec- Pat- Save
Paste Move Invert tangle tangle tern
< 1 dot cate area fill paste Back

When a dot was

Draws a graphic. (See 7.3.3.) Scroll rigth reversed by
> 1 dot touching it directly,
>> 8 dots make the display
magnification
quadruple.

5 Press Save .
The save screen is displayed.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

Dot matrix Free Manual Startup

HOME
When the save
destination is
specified, the
Touch the position Stored destination
pattern [002] save destination
on the keyboard to code and pattern
be saved. ★◎△
Logo are displayed.

EB
Cancel

Press to display
the next screen.
Change Change
− OK OK

6 Press OK .
The pattern is saved.

●Creating a user pattern 7-25

 7.3.5 Selecting a bitmap file(BMP)
(1) Functions
●The bitmap file stored in the USB memory is called up as a user pattern.
●This can be called up by the select bitmap data screen and pattern paste screen of the free size pattern being
edited.
●Use the following conditions to create the bitmap file.
Conditions of bit map file
Item Essential conditions
Size Width 1-320 pixels x Height 1-32 pixels
Color Monochrome (Monochrome bitmap)
File name ********.bmp (********must be within 8 digit alphanumeric or less)

●1 pixel in the bitmap corresponds to 1 dot in the user pattern.

(2) Operation
1 Create a "BITMAP" folder directory under USB memory, then copy the bitmap file
created earlier.

2 Insert the USB memory in the IJP.

3 Press Create user pattern and Select next in the auxiliary function menu.
The select screen is displayed.

Create user pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

Dot matrix 5x8 Manual Startup

HOME

123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△

Select bitmap
etc. ▽
Logo
data
Select
Q W E R T Y U I O P bitmap data

A S D F G H J K L Cancel

Z X C V B N M
Space OK
Change Change

7-26 ●Creating a user pattern

4 Press Select bitmap data .

Select bitmap data [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

No File name No File name

１ B_FILE1 １６ B_FILE16 Manual Startup
２ B_FILE2 １７ B_FILE17
３ B_FILE3 １８ B_FILE18 HOME
４ B_FILE4 １９ B_FILE19
５ B_FILE5 ２０ B_FILE20
６ B_FILE6 ２１
７ B_FILE7 ２２
８ B_FILE8 ２３
９ B_FILE9 ２４
１０ B_FILE10 ２５
１１ B_FILE11 ２６
１２ B_FILE12 ２７
Cancel
１３ B_FILE13 ２８
１４ B_FILE14 ２９ OK
１５ B_FILE15 ３０
OK

Select a file from the list of bitmap file

5 Select any file name from the list of bitmap file on the screen.
Press OK (Maximum of 30 file names is displayed).
The display returns to the Create user pattern screen.
Create user pattern [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45
Com=0
Bitmap image which has
Pattern [ ]
been selected as a pattern is
Dot matrix 5x8 displayed
Manual Startup

HOME

123/Sign ABCabc ★◎△

Logo
etc. ▽
Select
Q W E R T Y U I O P bitmap data

A S D F G H J K L Cancel

Z X C V B N M
OK
Space OK
Change Change

6 Press OK on the select screen.

The pattern is selected.

●Creating a user pattern 7-27

 7.4 Touch screen coordinate correction
(1) Functions
●Corrects touch screen and screen coordinate position offset.

(2) Operation
(a) New HMI

1 Press menu SETTINGS .

The Operation management screen is displayed.
Operation management × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Ink Operating Time Ink Alarm Time Cumulative Op.Time

（Standard Value：1200）
0h 1,200 h 0h
Ink/Makeup Ink Viscosity Ink Pressure（Standard Value：0.255）
（Standard Value：100）
0.255 MPa
10６７K/S100A 100 0.255
Deflection Voltage Excitation V-ref（Range：0-19） Excitation Frequency

5.7 11
kV
11 68.9 kHz
5.7
Ambient Temperature
（Correct Range：0-45）

20 ℃
Calibrate touch screen coordinates
Print Count
Calibrate touch
0 screen coordinates

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

2 Press Calibrate touch screen coordinates .

The Touch screen coord. screen is displayed.

3 Press the + at the top left and bottom right of the screen until the Touch Screen
Coordinate Correction message is displayed.
The Touch Screen Coordinate Correction message is displayed.

4 Press OK .
The coordinates are corrected and the touch screen returns to the Operation management screen.

7-28 ●Touch screen coordinate correction

(b) Previous HMI

1 Press Calibrate touch screen coordinates in the auxiliary functions menu.

The Touch screen coord. screen is displayed.

Touch screen coord. [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Cancel

Carefully touch the intersection of

the crosshairs.

2 Press the + at the top left and bottom right of the screen until the Touch Screen
Coordinate Correction message is displayed.
The Touch Screen Coordinate Correction message is displayed.

＝＝＝＝＝ Touch Screen Coordinate Correction ＝＝＝＝＝

Touch screen coordinate correction will be applied.

To return to the previous setting, press [Cancel].

OK Cancel

3 Press OK .
The coordinates are corrected and the touch screen returns to the auxiliary functions menu.

●Touch screen coordinate correction 7-29

 7.5 Backing up data to USB memory
7.5.1 Copy data all at once
(1) Functions
●Backs up print data and user patterns to USB memory.
●Backed up data can be copied to an IJ printer.
●When copying to an IJ printer, the type of data can be selected.

Data type Contents

●Includes the print description, print format, and print specifications set contents.
Print data ●Saved print data is the backup target. Print target data is not a target.
●When backing up print target data, save the data and back it up as saved print data.
Standard
●Includes all dot matrix standard character patterns.
characters
User pattern ●Includes all dot matrix saved characters.

●One USB memory can backup the data of multiple IJ printers.

●The same folder is created as the serial number in the USB memory.
●When copying backed up data from the USB memory to the IJ printer, select the folder to be copied.
●One USB memory can store the data for up to 100 IJ printers. However, the data size cannot exceed the
capacity of the USB memory.
●Use the auxiliary function menu to remove and insert the USB memory.
●Do not often repeatedly remove and insert the USB memory.
●When data copying standard patterns, start the copy data function in the stopped state.

● Use a USB Memory with interface 2.0/1.1 and FAT16 or FAT32 file system.
● When performing Backup operation (IJP→USB) and Data copy operation (USB→IJP),
if "USB memory error"occurs or USB cannot be recognized, format the USB on a PC.
● Please periodically back up print data and user patterns.

(2) Backup operation

The auxiliary function menu is displayed.

Aux. function menu [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Manage messages / Create user Calibrate touch
Group pattern screen coordinates HOME

Copy data Copy data Edit Standard

（ＩＪＰ → ＵＳＢ） （ＵＳＢ → ＩＪＰ） pattern

Edit substitution
Select Languages
rule

Back

1 Insert the USB memory.

7-30 ●Backing up data to USB memory

 2 Press Copy data (IJP→USB) .
The Backup screen is displayed and the data is written to USB memory.

Copy data ＩＪＰ→ＵＳＢ [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink
Data type
Print data ０／ ２０
Standard pattern ０／ １
User pattern ０／ １ HOME

Proc. Status ０／ ２２ Shows backup progress.

Accessing to USB memory. Don't remove USB memory.

Abort

Serial number ９９９９９９９９

Copying in progress.

After backup is complete, the screen returns to the auxiliary function menu.

3 Remove the USB memory.

(3) Data copy operation

The auxiliary function menu is displayed.

Aux. function menu [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

Manual Startup
Manage messages / Create user Calibrate touch
Group pattern screen coordinates HOME

Copy data Copy data Edit Standard

（ＩＪＰ → ＵＳＢ） （ＵＳＢ → ＩＪＰ） pattern

Edit substitution
Select Languages
rule

Back

1 Insert the USB memory.

●Backing up data to USB memory 7-31

 2 Press Copy data (USB→IJP) .
The copy data screen is displayed.

Selects the type Copy data ＵＳＢ→ＩＪＰ [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0
of data to be copied.
Makeup Ink
Data type Copy data
Print data Enable Disable
Standard pattern Enable Disable

User pattern Enable Disable HOME

Proc. Status
Selects the folder
to be copied.
Individual
copy

Cancel
Folder to be copied ９９９９９９９９
Serial number ９９９９９９９９

Select the copy target and then press <Start copy>. Start copy Start copy

3 Select the folder (serial number) to be copied.

4 Select the type of data to be copied.

5 Press OK .
A copying in progress screen is displayed.

Copy data ＵＳＢ→ＩＪＰ [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink
Data type Copy data
Print data Enable Disable ０／ ２０
Standard pattern Enable Disable ０／ １５
User pattern Enable Disable ０／ ４ HOME

Proc. Status ０／ ３９ Shows the data

copying progress.

Accessing to USB memory. Don't remove USB memory.

Folder to be copied ９９９９９９９９

Serial number ９９９９９９９９

Copying in progress.

After data copying is complete, the screen returns to the auxiliary function menu.

6 Remove the USB memory.

7-32 ●Backing up data to USB memory

7.5.2 Copy data individually
(1) Functions
●Print data and User pattern which are backed-up in USB memory can be copied separately.
●When copying data, a separate copying operation is required for Print data and User pattern respectively.
●There are two (2) copy methods: “Add column to end” and “Overwrite”. “Add column to end” is to copy data
next to the number of already-registered. “Overwrite” is to copy data onto already-registered number(s).
●There are three (3) Copy source selections: “Normal”, “Multiple” and “Area”. “Normal” selects one data.
When “Overwrite” is selected as Copy method, Copy data can be made onto any number.
“Multiple” can select the print data which are NOT in consecutive numbers.
“Area” can select a plural print data which are in consecutive numbers.
In case “Multiple” or “Area” is selected, Copy data to any number is NOT available.
●When the plural print data are added to the end and the number of data goes beyond the maximum:
The empty data space is searched from the first number and the data will be copied there.
If there is NO space available, the data will NOT be copied.
●When the print data with the message name which is the same as that of already-existing message is copied to
the end, the message name will be renamed based on that of the source, replacing the last four (4) digits with
the registration number.
●Upon copying data, when Substitution rules is NOT registered, Substitution rules will be assigned at the same
number.
●Upon copying data, if Substitution rules is already registered, Substitution rules will be assigned/saved at the
empty number. The new number will be also assigned for Substitution rules of the print data.
●Upon copying data, if there is NO space available for Substitution rules, “Substitution Rules Confirmation”
will be displayed and Substitution rules for the print data will NOT be available.
●If there is NO space available for Print data, “Excessive Number of Messages” will be displayed.

(2) Individual Copy data operation for Print data

1 Insert backed-up USB memory into IJP.

2 Press Copy data (USB → IJP) .

Copy data ＵＳＢ→ＩＪＰ [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink
Data type Copy data
Print data Enable Disable
Standard pattern Enable Disable

User pattern Enable Disable HOME

Proc. Status

Individual
Individual copy
copy

Cancel
Folder to be copied ９９９９９９９９
Serial number ９９９９９９９９

Select the copy target and then press [Start copy]. Start copy

3 Select the folder (serial number) to be copied.

●Backing up data to USB memory 7-33

 4 Press Individual copy .
“Copy individual print data” screen is displayed.

2018.07.07 12:45
Copy individual print data [Stop ] Com=0 Select how
Select the copy print data and the copy destination.
Makeup Ink you select
Select Copy Copy method Add column to end Overwrite
Print data.
method. Free space % Normal Multipe Area

▲ USB IJP ▲
HOME
No Message name No Message name
１ ＡＡＢＢＣＣ １ ＡＡＢＢＣＣ
２ ＣＡＬＥＮ ２ ＣＡＬＥＮ
Print data in ３ ＳＨＩＦＴ ３ ＳＨＩＦＴ
４ ＣＯＭＭＯＮ ４ ＣＯＭＭＯＮ
USB memory →
５ ＡＡＢＢＣＣ
６ ＣＯＭＭＯＮ User
pattern

Cancel

▼ ▼
Start copy
Start copy

5 Select Copy method and press how you select Print data.

6 Select Print data to be copied from USB memory.

7 Press Start copy .

The message “Copying in progress” will be displayed.

Copy individual print data [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Makeup Ink
Select the copy print data and the copy destination.
Copy method Add column to end Overwrite
Free space % Normal Multipe Area

▲ USB IJP ▲
HOME
No Message name No Message name
１ ＡＡＢＢＣＣ １ ＡＡＢＢＣＣ
２ ＣＡＬＥＮ ２ ＣＡＬＥＮ
３ ＳＨＩＦＴ ３ ＳＨＩＦＴ
Copying in progress.
４ ＣＯＭＭＯＮ ４ ＣＯＭＭＯＮ
→
５ ＡＡＢＢＣＣ
６ ＣＯＭＭＯＮ User
pattern

Cancel

▼ ▼
Start copy

8 Press HOME and return to Print description screen, then remove USB memory.

7-34 ●Backing up data to USB memory

(3) Individual Copy data operation for User pattern

1 Insert USB memory into IJP.

2 Press Copy data (USB → IJP) .

Copy data ＵＳＢ→ＩＪＰ [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink
Data type Copy data
Print data Enable Disable
Standard pattern Enable Disable

User pattern Enable Disable HOME

Proc. Status

Individual
Individual
copy copy

Cancel
Folder to be copied ９９９９９９９９
Serial number ９９９９９９９９

Select the copy target and then press [Start copy]. Start copy

3 Select the folder (serial number) to be copied.

4 Press Individual copy .

“Copy individual print data” screen is displayed.

Copy individual print data [Stop ] Com=0

2018.07.07 12:45
Makeup Ink
Select the copy print data and the copy destination.
Copy method Add column to end Overwrite
Free space % Normal Multipe Area

▲ USB IJP ▲
HOME
No Message name No Message name
１ ＡＡＢＢＣＣ １ ＡＡＢＢＣＣ
２ ＣＡＬＥＮ ２ ＣＡＬＥＮ
３ ＳＨＩＦＴ ３ ＳＨＩＦＴ
４ ＣＯＭＭＯＮ ４ ＣＯＭＭＯＮ
→
５ ＡＡＢＢＣＣ
６ ＣＯＭＭＯＮ
User
User
pattern pattern

Cancel

▼ ▼
Start copy

●Backing up data to USB memory 7-35

 5 Press User pattern .
“Copy individual user pattern” screen is displayed.

Copy individual user pattern [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0
Select how
Horizonal dot Fixed Free Makeup Ink you select
Select Copy Copy method Add column to end Overwrite User pattern.
method. Dot matrix 5x8 Normal Multipe Area

HOME
USB
Pattern
[ ]
User pattern in Page No.
USB memory 1／6
Shift Shift
V
V

IJP
Stored
destination Cancel
[ ]
Page No.
1／6 Shift Shift
V
V Start copy Start copy

6 Select Copy method and press how you select User pattern.

7 Select User pattern to be copied from USB memory.

8 Press Start copy .

The message “Copying in progress” will be displayed.

Copy individual user pattern [Stop ] 2018.07.07 12:45

Com=0

Horizonal dot Fixed Free Makeup Ink

Copy method Add column to end Overwrite
Dot matrix 5x8 Normal Multipe Area

HOME
USB
Pattern
[ ]
Page No.
1／6
Shift Shift Copying in progress.
V
V

IJP
Stored
destination Cancel
[ ]
Page No.
1／6 Shift Shift
V Start copy
V

9 Press HOME and return to Print description screen, then remove USB memory.

7-36 ●Backing up data to USB memory

7.6 Editing standard pattern
(1) Functions
●Edits the print pattern in dot units.
●Punct. symbols are edited as patterns separate from full-width symbols.
●Pattern editing operation is the same as the user pattern creation function.
●Pattern-edited characters are displayed in blue on the keyboard.
●Create patterns while printing with the user pattern creation function. After applying the pattern design, use
the edit standard character pattern function.
●The original pattern before the change can be recovered.

(2) Operation

1 Press Edit standard pattern in the auxiliary function menu.

The Edit standard pattern screen is displayed.

The 2 red frames display the same area.

Edit standard pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [ ]

Dot pattern
creation area HOME

Dot matrix Dot matrix 5x8 Select

Select

Back

2 Press Select .
The select screen is displayed.

3 Select characters to call.

Edit standard pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
Pattern [E ]

Dot matrix 5x8

HOME

Selects the type

of character.

123/Sign ABCabc etc. ▽

Selects the Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ
character to
be selected. Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ Cancel

Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ

Change Change
Space OK OK

●Editing standard pattern 7-37

 4 Press OK .
The pattern is selected.

Edit standard pattern [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Pattern [E ]
E

HOME

Edit
Edit
Restores the pattern
Restore
before the change.
Dot matrix 5x8 Select Save
Save

Back

5 Create a pattern at the dot pattern creation area.

When directly touched, the shading of the dot is reversed.
When a dot was reversed by touching it directly, make the display magnification quadruple.

6 Press Save .
The save message screen is displayed.

7-38 ●Editing standard pattern

7.7 Editing Substitution Rules
(1) Functions
●Selects the substitution rule [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour], [Minute], [Week number], and [Day of week] and
inputs and edits the selected substitution rule.
●Inputs and changes the name of the selected substitution rules.
See “4.11.3 Print by substituting a different character for the date (substitution rule)”.

(2) Operation
1 Press Edit substitution rule in the auxiliary function menu.
The Edit substitution rule screen is displayed.
Sort

Edit substitution rule [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Message name [ ] Makeup Ink

Manual Startup

Selects the No△ Subst. rule name No△ Subst. rule name
HOME
substitution １ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００１ １３ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１３
２ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００２ １４ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１４
rule to be Prev.Dsp. ,
３ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００３ １５ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１５
edited. ４ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００４ １６ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１６ Next Dsp.
５ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００５ １７ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１７ Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
６ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００６ １８ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１８ Select page Select page
７ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００７ １９ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１９ 1/1

８ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００８ ２０ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２０
９ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００９ ２１ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２１ Cancel

１０ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１０ ２２ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２２
１１ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１１ ２３ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２３
Changes the １２ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０１２ ２４ ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ０２４

substitution
Change
rule name. rule name
OK OK

2 Select the substitution rule to be edited and press OK .

The Edit substitution rule screen is displayed.
Selects the substitution rule [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour],
[Minute], [Week number], and [Day of week].

Substitution rule No. Edit substitution rule [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45
No. [０１] Subst. rule name [ＲＥＰＬＡＣＥ００１ ] Digit 2 Input digit
Year Month Day Hour
Week Day of
Minute number week
number
Manual Startup
15[ ] 16[ ] 17[ ] 18[ ] 19[ ] 20[ ]
21[ ] 22[ ] 23[ ] 24[ ] 25[ ] 26[ ]
27[ ] 28[ ] 29[ ] 30[ ] 31[ ] 32[ ]
33[ ] 34[ ] 35[ ] 36[ ] 37[ ] 38[ ]
39[ ]

↑
123‥ ABC… ★◎ ‥ etc. ▽
Sign Logo Delete Back space ← →
Over-
Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ Ｆ Ｇ Ｈ Ｉ Ｊ Insert write
↓
Ｋ Ｌ Ｍ Ｎ Ｏ Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ Ｓ Ｔ
Duplicates the
Duplicate
Ｕ Ｖ Ｗ Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ previous item.
Space
Change Change Back

3 Select the kind [Year], [Month], [Day], [Hour], [Minute], [Week number],
[Day of week] of substitution rule, and input and edit.
4 Press Back .
The display returns to the substitution rule selection screen.
●Editing Substitution Rules 7-39
 7.8 Selecting Languages
(1) Functions
● You can change the screen language from English to another language.
Input mode
Set value Contents
Default ●You can input Accent marks, Greek, Russian and Arabic characters.
●You can input Chinese characters.
Local Language
(Language1 : English, Thai, Vietnamese only)

(2) Operation
The Auxiliary function menu screen is displayed.

1 Press Select languages in the auxiliary functions menu.

The Select language screen is displayed.

Select language [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Current language English ０１．

００

Registered language

Language1 English ０１．

００
Language2 German ０１．
００

Input mode Default Local Language

German

OK
OK
Back

2 Select German ,and press OK .

The display language is changed.

7-40 ●Selecting Languages

 8. INK AND MAKEUP
REPLENISHMENT
WARNING
● Never pour the ink and makeup waste into a sewer, etc.
Have the ink and makeup drainage processed by an industrial waste processor as
special control industrial waste and used wiping papers and the empty container as
industrial waste.
● Do not remove, apply unreasonable force to, or bend the piping tubes unnecessarily.
Since high pressure is applied to parts of the ink and solvent inside the piping tube,
the ink and solvent may spurt out and get into your eyes and mouth or soil your
hands and clothing.
If the ink or solvent gets into your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse it out with warm
water and see a doctor.
● When replenishing the ink and makeup, changing the ink, or performing other work in
which the ink and makeup are handled, be sure not to spill the ink and makeup.
If the ink and makeup is accidentally spilled, quickly wipe it off with wiping paper, etc.
Do not close the maintenance cover until you verify that the wiped parts are
completely dry.
Since the ink and makeup vapor will collect inside the printer especially in the state in
which the ink and makeup was spilled inside the printer and was not wiped off
completely, it will cause ignition and fire.
When wiping is difficult in the energized state, perform shutdown processing with the
maintenance cover remaining open and turn off the power, then perform wiping
again.
● If leaking of the ink and makeup inside the printer was detected during printer
operation or maintenance, quickly wipe it with wiping paper, etc. and perform
shutdown processing with the maintenance cover remaining open and turn off the
power, then repair the leak.
If operation is continued when the ink and makeup is leaking, it will cause trouble
and prevent normal printing will become.
In addition, since the ink and makeup are combustible, they may cause a fire.
● The ink and makeup, their waste solution, used wiping papers and empty containers
are flammable. Waste disposal must comply with appropriate regulations.
Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.
● When the ink particles are caught in a beaker during test printing, etc., use a
conductive beaker and securely connect the beaker to a ground.
In addition, be sure that the print head is not inserted into the beaker.
Since the ink particles used in printing are electrically charged, if the beaker is not
connected to a ground, the charge load will gradually increase and cause a fire.

CAUTION
● Pay careful attention to the following items regarding handling of the ink and makeup:
1 Wear gloves and goggles so that the ink and makeup will not directly contact your
skin.
If the ink or makeup gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and warm water.
2 When taking the bottle from the printer, be careful that the ink does not get on the
printer or surroundings. If the ink or makeup gets on the equipment or
surroundings, immediately wipe it off with makeup.
3 Since the vapor pressure of the makeup is generally high, if the ambient
temperature is high such as in the summer, etc., the internal pressure will rise and
makeup could spurt out when the outside cover is removed. Therefore, when
unplugging,
●do not hold the bottle near your face
●place the bottle on a level surface
●open while covering the opening with a rag, etc.
●Ink and makeup replenishment 8-1
 8.1 Replenishing the ink
(1) Overview
●Ink can be refilled when the remaining ink icon is at the position which indicates that the cartridge bottle
can be replaced.
●Replenish the ink in the ink reservoir within 60 minutes after an Ink Low warning is generated. If the ink is
not replenished, the printer will stop.
●When the ink is replenished, the warning is automatically reset.
●Ink can only be refilled while the power is ON.
<Remaining Ink Icon>
Full Empty

Replaceable Ink level

[NOTE] If the color of icon is "Green", the ink cartridge bottle can't be replaced.

●If the ink cartridge bottle with reduced content is set in the printer, the level of the Remaining Ink Icon
displayed on the screen may suddenly drop to the Replaceable Ink level. However, this is not a failure and
the printer operation can be continued.

(2) Operation

CAUTION
● Do not grip the over cap and lift the cartridge bottle.
The cartridge bottle could be dropped.
● Since an IC chip is built into the cartridge bottle, avoid strong shock and
electromagnetic waves and liquid wetting.

1 Remove the over cap of an ink cartridge bottle.

The over cap is a cap that is necessary at storage.
It is unnecessary at ink refill.
Over cap

Ink cartridge bottle

Ink cap

CAUTION
● When the ink cap was loosened, set it after tightening firmly.
Otherwise the ink may spill when setting the cartridge bottle.
● After removing the over cap, do not allow your finger, foreign matter or dirt to
get into the hole of the ink cap. Doing so could cause ink leakage and
equipment failure.
● Do not change the ink cap of the ink cartridge bottle or makeup cap of the
makeup cartridge bottle. Ink or makeup could spill.
8-2 ●Replenishing the ink
[When IC tag reader is supported]

2 Hold the cartridge bottle over the RFID reader of the printer so that the IC tag
mark of the label on the bottle can be read.
● If the Ink ID is read by the IJ printer, steps 2 -1 and 2 -2 are not necessary.

IC tag mark

Scan
here

RFID Reader

Within 30 mm

CAUTION
● If there is still ink remaining in the Cartridge bottle, do not replace it even if
the Remaining Ink Icon indicates replacement. This could be due to
malfunction on the parts. Contact your nearest distributor.
The part may be broken; contact your nearest distributor.
● If there is no reaction when you hold the cartridge bottle over the reader of
the printer, the IC tag of the cartridge may be damaged.
In this case, an ink ID can be input manually from the IJP screen.
(Steps 2 -1 and 2 -2)

●Replenishing the ink 8-3

 2 -1 If manually inputting the ID, touch the icon on the home screen of the IJP,
call up the ID input screen and input the Ink ID.
● An ink ID is printed on the label of the cartridge bottle.

Scan
here

Ink ID

Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Print description [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2 Message name[ABC123 ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋
EXIT

Twin

1 2

Operating Time Count Reset Makeup Ink

100 h Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink

Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
TEST
Print Count
Print count １０００(prints)
Print Count
1.000 START PRINTING SHUTDOWN
Ink pressure 2 ０．２６０ reset

Ink pressure 1 ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

Menu
message message message parameters management
HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

Icon Icon

2 -2 Manually input the ink ID in the ID input area.

To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the Change
or Change
key.
Ink ID entry [STOP ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45

Enter the Ink ID of the Ink cartridge into the entry

field below.

Cancel
← → Enter

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L
Z X C V B N M Change Change

Back

CAUTION
● If the ID cannot be read because it is dirtied by ink, etc., contact your nearest
distributor.

8-4 ●Replenishing the ink

3 When the ink ID is read, the lock on the ink side is released.

4 1 Tilt the lever handle toward yourself, 2 lift and 3 remove the
cartridge bottle.
Lift the lever handle and remove
Lever handle the empty cartridge bottle.

1
2

CAUTION
● If the lever handle could not be lifted up, do not pull it with excessive force.
In such a case, push the lever handle all the way in.
Lever handle

Push

CAUTION
● After removing the cartridge bottle from the IJP, quickly place the cap toward
the top. Also do not expose the cartridge bottle to impacts after being removed.
Doing so could cause ink to splatter.
● Do not turn the cartridge bottle with the cartridge bottle set in the IJP.
The ink cap could become loosened and ink may overflow.
● Do not put waste solution in used cartridge bottles.
Waste solution could spill. You should note that used cartridge bottles are not
hermetically sealed even when the over cap is mounted.
● If used cartridge bottles are filled with ink or makeup and reused, ink or
makeup could spill.

●Replenishing the ink 8-5

 5 Set a new cartridge bottle in the specified position.
Set the boss provided on the cartridge bottle to the boss guide of the ink supply port.

Set a new cartridge bottle.

Ink side

Ink supply port

Boss guide
Set the boss to the guide.

Boss Pipe

CAUTION
● If ink has accumulated on the pipe surface, wipe it up using wiping paper
dampened with makeup.

Be careful not to damage

the pipe surface.

● If a foreign object such as a screw is found or gets in the ink supply port,
remove it.

8-6 ●Replenishing the ink

6 When a new cartridge bottle is set, press the lever handle down and it into the
printer.
Lever handle

Lever handle

Push

CAUTION
● Be careful not to get your hand or fingers pinched when pushing down the
lever handle. (See the figure below.)

Lever handle Lever handle

7 The cartridge replacement (ink refill) is now completed.

Press Complete at the IJ printer guidance screen.
Pressing Complete confirms that ink refill is complete.

Replacement Ink cartridge [Stop ]

Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Ink

(2) (3)

(1)

(4)
HELP

(1) Lift the lever handle to the direction of an arrow.

If the lever handle could NOT be lifted up, press <HELP>.
(2) Remove the empty Ink Cartridge Bottle. Abort

(3) Place the new Ink Cartridge Bottle to its set position.
(4) Push the lever handle down.
(5) Press <Complete> on the screen. Complete Complete

●Replenishing the ink 8-7

 8.2 Replenishing the makeup
(1) Overview
● Makeup can be refilled when the remaining makeup icon is at the position which indicates that the
cartridge bottle can be replaced.
●Replenish the makeup in the makeup reservoir within 60 minutes after a Makeup Low warning is
generated. If replenishment is not performed, the printer will stop.
●When the makeup is replenished, the warning is automatically reset.
●Makeup can only be refilled while the power is ON.
<Remaining Makeup Icon>
Full Empty

Replaceable Makeup level

[NOTE] If the color of icon is "Green", the makeup cartridge bottle can't be replaced.

●Please set an unopened makeup cartridge bottle or an opened makeup cartridge bottle still has more than
half of its content. Before makeup cartridge bottle with reduced content is set in the printer, place the
cartridge bottle horizontally and confirm its level is more than half of its content.

Liquid level
Liquid level

●If the makeup cartridge bottle with reduced content is set in the printer, the level of the Remaining Makeup
Icon displayed on the screen may suddenly drop to the Replaceable Makeup level. However, this is not a
failure and the printer operation can be continued.

(2) Operation
CAUTION
● Do not grip the over cap and lift the cartridge bottle.
The cartridge bottle could be dropped.
● Since an IC chip is built into the cartridge bottle, avoid strong shock and
electromagnetic waves and liquid wetting.

1 Remove the over cap of a makeup cartridge bottle.

The over cap is a cap that is necessary at storage.
It is unnecessary at makeup refill.
Over cap

Makeup
cartridge bottle

Makeup cap

8-8 ●Replenishing the makeup

 CAUTION
● When the makeup cap was loosened, set it after tightening firmly.
Otherwise the makeup may spill when setting the cartridge bottle.
● After removing the over cap, do not allow your finger, foreign matter or dirt to
get into the hole of the makeup cap. Doing so could cause makeup leakage
and equipment failure.
● Do not change the ink cap of the ink cartridge bottle or makeup cap of the
makeup cartridge bottle. Ink or makeup could spill.

[When IC tag reader is supported]

2 Hold the cartridge bottle over the RFID reader of the printer so that the IC tag
mark of the label on the bottle can be read.
● If the makeup ID is read by the IJ printer, steps 2 -1 and 2 -2 are not necessary.

IC tag mark

Scan
here

型 式：＊＊＊＊＊
ロット／ LOT：＊＊＊＊＊＊
補力液ID／Makeup ID
＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
開封期限
： ＊＊＊＊.＊＊
／Expiration date
部品コード
／Parts Code ： ＊＊＊＊＊＊

RFID Reader

Within 30 mm

CAUTION
● If there is still makeup remaining in the Cartridge bottle, do not replace it
even if the Remaining Ink Icon indicates replacement. This could be due to
malfunction on the parts. Contact your nearest distributor.
The part may be broken; contact your nearest distributor.
● If the makeup cartridge bottle has less than half of its content is set in the
printer, the message "Cartridge replacement error" may be displayed on the
screen. In that case, select the content of makeup cartridge bottle just
replaced according to the guidance displayed on the screern.
● If there is no reaction when you hold the cartridge bottle over the reader of
the printer, the IC tag of the cartridge may be damaged.
In this case, an makeup ID can be input manually from the IJP screen.
(Steps 2 -1 and 2 -2)

●Replenishing the makeup 8-9

 2 -1 If manually inputting the ID, touch the icon on the home screen of the IJP,
call up the ID input screen and input the Makeup ID.
● A makeup ID is printed on the label of the cartridge bottle.

Makeup ID

Scan
here

型 式：＊＊＊＊＊
ロット／ LOT：＊＊＊＊＊＊
補力液ID／Makeup ID
＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
開封期限
： ＊＊＊＊.＊＊
／Expiration date
部品コード
／Parts Code ： ＊＊＊＊＊＊

Print description × STOP OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

Print description [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2 Message name[ABC123 ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋
EXIT

Twin

1 2

Operating Time Count Reset Makeup Ink

100 h Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink

Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
TEST
Print Count
Print count １０００(prints)
Print Count
1.000 START PRINTING SHUTDOWN
Ink pressure 2 ０．２６０ reset

Ink pressure 1 ０．２６０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation

Menu
message message message parameters management
HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

Icon Icon

2 -2 Manually input the makeup ID in the ID input area.

To toggle between upper and lower case letters, press the Change
or Change
key.
Makeup ID entry [STOP ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45

Enter the Makeup ID of the Makeup cartridge into

the entry field below.

Cancel
← → Enter

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L
Z X C V B N M Change Change

Back

CAUTION
● If the ID cannot be read because it is dirtied by ink, etc., contact your nearest
distributor.

8-10 ●Replenishing the makeup

3 When the makeup ID is read, the lock on the makeup side is released.

4 1 Tilt the lever handle toward yourself, 2 lift and 3 remove the
cartridge bottle.
Lever handle Lift the lever handle and remove the empty
cartridge bottle.

CAUTION
● If the lever handle could not be lifted up, do not pull it with excessive force.
In such a case, push the lever handle all the way in.

Push

Lever handle

CAUTION
● After removing the cartridge bottle from the IJP, quickly place the cap toward
the top. Also do not expose the cartridge bottle to impacts after being removed.
Doing so could cause ink to splatter.
● Do not put waste solution in used cartridge bottles.
Waste solution could spill. You should note that used cartridge bottles are not
hermetically sealed even when the over cap is mounted.
● If used cartridge bottles are filled with ink or makeup and reused, ink or
makeup could spill.

●Replenishing the makeup 8-11

 5 Set a new cartridge bottle in the specified position.
Set the boss provided on the cartridge bottle to the boss guide of the makeup supply port.

Set a new cartridge bottle.

Makeup side

Makeup supply port

Boss guide

Boss

CAUTION
● If a foreign object such as a screw is found or gets in the makeup supply port,
remove it.

6 When a new cartridge bottle is set, press the lever handle down and it into the
printer.
Lever handle

Lever handle

8-12 ●Replenishing the makeup

 CAUTION
● Be careful not to get your hand or fingers pinched when pushing down the
lever handle. (See the figure below.)

Lever handle Lever handle

7 The cartridge replacement (makeup refill) is now completed.

Press Complete at the IJ printer guidance screen.
Pressing Complete confirms that makeup refill is complete.
Replacement Makeup cartridge [Stop ] Com=0 2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup

(2) (3)

(1)

(4)
HELP

(1) Lift the lever handle to the direction of an arrow.

If the lever handle could NOT be lifted up, press <HELP>.
(2) Remove the empty Makeup Cartridge Bottle. Abort

(3) Place the new Makeup Cartridge Bottle to its set position.
(4) Push the lever handle down.
(5) Press <Complete> on the screen. Complete Complete

CAUTION
● The IJ printer on which the “Makeup Level Sensor Broken 1” Fault appeared,
the Makeup Cartridge can NOT be replaced until “Makeup Low” Warning
appears.

<Remaining Makeup Icon>

Full Empty

Replaceable Makeup level :

After the “Makeup Level
Sensor Broken 1” Fault
appeared.

●Replenishing the makeup 8-13

 9. WHEN WARNING OR FAULT
WAS GENERATED
9.1 Display when warning or fault was generated
●When a warning or fault was generated, a warning or fault lamp lights.

Operational status display lamp

●When an operation mistake is made and processing judgment is prompted, a confirmation message is
displayed.
●When a “Fault state” which hinders printing was generated while the liquid crystal screen
backlighting was off or when a “Warning state” which does not hinder printing but requires
maintenance was generated, a fault message or warning message is displayed in a window.

(1) When a fault was generated

(a) New HMI
The name of the fault The description, cause,
message is displayed. and solution are displayed. Message No.

FAULT ×

Target Sensor Timer out No.0052

The print target detector signal was ON longer than
the timeout setting of Target Sensor Timer.
Cause 1. The print target detector signal ON time is long.
2. The Target Sensor Timer setting is incorrect.
Solution 1. If the target is stopped in front of the sensor, move the target.
2. Change the Target Sensor Timer setting.

Reset Close

(b) Previous HMI

The name of the fault The description, cause,
Message No. message is displayed. and solution are displayed.

0052 ◆◆◆◆◆ Target Sensor Timer 0ut ◆◆◆◆◆

The print target detector signal was ON longer than

the timeout setting of Target Sensor Timer.
Cause 1. The print target detector signal ON time is long.
2. The Target Sensor Timer setting is incorrect.
Solution 1. If the target is stopped in front of the sensor, move the target.
2. Change the Target Sensor Timer setting.

Reset Close

●When Reset is pressed after removing the cause, the fault state is cleared and the message is also
closed.
●When Close is pressed, the fault window is closed, but the fault state is not cleared. When Fault in
state area, the fault message is displayed again.
●However, when the fault state is already cleared, it is cleared by Close .
9-1 ●Display when warning or fault was generated
(2) When warning was generated
(a) New HMI

The name of the warning The description, cause,

message is displayed. and solution are displayed. Message No.

WARNING ×

Ink Low Warning No.0081

The ink level in the ink reservoir is low.

Cause 1. The ink reservoir is almost empty.
2. The Low Level sensor in the ink reservoir is faulty.
Solution 1. Replace the Ink Cartridge within 60 minutes.
2. Check the Low Level sensor.

Close

(b) Previous HMI

The name of the warning The description, cause,
Message No. message is displayed. and solution are displayed.

0081 ◇◇◇◇◇ Ink Low Warning ◇◇◇◇◇

The ink level in the ink reservoir is low.

Cause 1. The ink reservoir is almost empty.
2. The Low Level sensor in the ink reservoir is faulty.
Solution 1. Replace the Ink Cartridge within 60 minutes.
2. Check the Low Level sensor.

Close

●When Close is pressed, the warning window is closed, but the warning state is not cleared.
The warning name is displayed in the warning display area (see the figure above).
●If the warning state is cleared, the warning display is automatically closed.

●Display when warning or fault was generated 9-2

 (3) When a mistake was generated or when processing judgment is prompted
(a) New HMI
The name of the confirmation The description, cause,
message is displayed. and solution are displayed. Message No.

CONFIRMATION ×

Ink Jet Startup Confirmation No.0050

The ink jet will be turned ON.

Solution 1. To change the printer status to Ready, press <Ready>.

2. To change the printer status to Standby, press <Eject ink>.

Ready Eject ink Cancel

(b) Previous HMI

The name of the confirmation The description, cause,
Message No. message is displayed. and solution are displayed.

0050 ===== Ink Jet Startup Confirmation =====

The ink jet will be turned ON.

Solution 1. To change the printer status to Ready, press <Ready>.

2. To change the printer status to Standby, press <Eject ink>.

Ready Eject ink Close

●The contents of the confirmation message are described at the place of each operation.

(4) Guidance for Fault / Waring

(a) New HMI

Print description FAULT OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

Displays the guidance.

Fault ? ×

Main Ink Tank Too Full No.0002

The ink level in the main ink tank is too high.

Cause 1. The valve
Operating Time Count(MV2)
Reset or valve (MV7) is
Makeup Inkfaulty.
2. The High Level sensor in the main ink tank is faulty.
100 1.
Solution h Drain proper amount of ink in the main ink tank.
2. Check the High Level sensor.
TEST
3. Print Count your local distributor.
Contact
1.000 START PRINTING
Close
STARTUP
Reset

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

9-3 ●Display when warning or fault was generated

 ● If the message prompts the guidance, HELP will be shown on upper right corner.
● When HELP is pressed, the guidance for the fault/warning will appear.

Print description FAULT OFFLINE 2018.07.07 12:45

ABC123 2
1 Twin − 100% ＋ ID:User2

1. Drain proper amount of ink in the main ink tank.

Operating Time Count Reset Makeup Ink

100 h
TEST
Print Count

1.000 START PRINTING STARTUP

Back

HOME OPEN SAVE ADJUST EDIT SETTINGS LOGIN

● When Back is pressed, the guidance will be closed and the message will be shown again.

● The messages listed below have guidance.

No. Type Message

1 Main Ink Tank Too Full
2 Ink Drop Charge Too Low
3 Fault Deflection Voltage Leakage
4 No Ink Drop Charge
5 Ink Drop Charge Too High

(b) Previous HMI

Print description [Fault ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45
Message name[ABC123 ] Current user ID : user2

Manual Startup
− ＋
Press HELP , then the
Twin
guidance will appear.
1 2
0002 ◆◆◆◆◆ Main Ink Tank Too Full HELP

The ink level in the main ink tank is too high.

Cause 1. The valve (MV2) or valve (MV7) is faulty.
Ink operating time １００(hours) Makeup Ink
2. The High Level sensor in the main ink tank is faulty.
Cumulative op. time １００(hours)
Solution 1. Drain proper amount of ink in the main ink tank.
Print count 2. Check １０００(prints)
the High Level sensor. Print Count
Ink pressure 2 3. Contact０．０2１
your local distributor. reset

Ink pressure 1 ０．０2０(MPa；standard value:０．２６０)

Reset Close
Change Select Overwrite Adjust print Operation
Menu
message message message parameters management

●Display when warning or fault was generated 9-4

 9.2 On-screen message descriptions
9.2.1 Fault messages
(1) Faults that invoke ink stoppage

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy

The ink reservoir is almost empty and
printing will stop.
(If the ink is not added within 60 minutes ● Replace the Ink Cartridge.
1 Ink Low Fault
after warning output, the printer comes to a ( 8.1).
stop with the warning condition replaced
by a fault condition.)
● Drain proper amount of ink
Main Ink Tank Too The ink level in the main ink tank is too in the main ink tank.
2
Full high. ( Technical manual
6.3, 6.12).
Deflection Voltage The high-voltage power supply output ● Contact your nearest local
3
Fault voltage is too low or too high. distributor.
Ink replenishment The automatic ink refill process exceeded ● Contact your nearest local
4
Time-out the time limit. distributor.
● Clean the gutter, deflection
electrode, and its
surroundings.
● Adjust ink pressure.
Ink Drop Charge
5 The ink drops are poorly charged. ( Technical manual 6.9).
Too Low
● Adjust the excitation setting
to make sure that the ink
drops are well made.
( Technical manual 6.10).
System operation ● Turn the power OFF and then
6 Unexpected error occurred.
error C back ON after 10 seconds.
System operation ● Turn the power OFF and then
7 Unexpected error occurred.
error M back ON after 10 seconds.
System operation ● Turn the power OFF and then
8 Unexpected error occurred.
error S back ON after 10 seconds.
Deflection Voltage ● Clean and dry the deflection
9 The deflection electrode voltage is too low.
Leakage electrode and nearby parts.
Makeup
The automatic makeup refill process ● Contact your nearest local
10 replenishment
exceeded the time limit. distributor.
Time-out
The makeup reservoir is almost empty and
printing will stop.
● Replace the Makeup
(If the makeup is not added within 60
11 Makeup Low Fault Cartridge.
minutes after warning output, the printer
( 8.2).
comes to a stop with the warning condition
replaced by a fault condition.)
Ink Heating Unit The temperature of the ink heater in the
● Contact your nearest local
12 Temprature Too print head is too high.
distributor.
High The heater will be temporarily deactivated.
The cooling fan in the multi DC power
Multi DC Power supply has a fault. The ink ejection will ● Contact your nearest local
13
Supply Fan Fault stop and the printer will be automatically distributor.
shutdown.
9-5 ●On-screen message descriptions
No. Message Meaning of message Remedy
The charging voltage supplied to the nozzle
Charge Voltage ● Contact your nearest local
14 drive board EZJ125 from the high-voltage
Too Low distributor.
power supply unit is too low.
Charge Voltage ● Check that there is no short-
15 The charge electrode signal is faulty.
Fault circuit with another part.
● Check if the ink stream is at
about the center of the gutter.
● Clean the gutter, deflection
electrode, and its
surroundings.
● Check the ink pressure.
No Ink Drop
16 The ink drops are not electrically charged. ( Technical manual 6.9).
Charge
● Adjust the excitation V-ref. to
make sure that the ink drops
are well made.
( Technical manual 6.10).
● Check that the ink stream is
correctly retracted.
Ink Heating Unit The temperature measured at the ink
● Contact your nearest local
17 Temperature heating unit is out of normal range.
distributor.
Sensor Fault The heater will be temporarily deactivated.
18 Memory Fault C The memory data has a fault. ● Execute system setup.
The memory of the option board EZJ130 ● Contact your nearest local
19 Memory Fault OP
has a fault. distributor.
● Contact your nearest local
20 Memory Fault M The memory data has a fault.
distributor.
Internal
● Turn the power OFF and then
22 Communication The internal data processing error.
back ON after 10 seconds.
Error S
● Afer ink is stopped, turn OFF
Unexpected error occurred.
System Operation the power of the printer.
23 Please verify if the work is printed
Error S ● Contact your nearest local
correctly.
distributor
Ink Heating The ink heating element is shorted. ● Contact your nearest local
24
Unit Over Current The heater will be temporarily deactivated. distributor.
Ambient
The ambient temperature measurement is ● Contact your nearest local
25 Temperature
out of normal range. distributor.
Sensor Fault
Print Controller The cooling fan of the print controller area ● Contact your nearest local
26
Cooling Fan Fault is faulty. distributor.
● Contact your nearest local
30 Memory Fault S The memory data has a fault.
distributor.
● Contact your nearest local
31 Pump Motor Fault Pump motor is faulty.
distributor.
Inside Temperature The inside temperature measurement is out ● Contact your nearest local
32
Sensor Fault of normal range. distributor.

●On-screen message descriptions 9-6

 No. Message Meaning of message Remedy
The ink heater in the print head is unable to
Ink Heating Unit heat the ink enough to reach the correct ● Contact your nearest local
34
Temperature Low operating temperature. distributor.
The heater will be temporarily deactivated.
● Contact your nearest local
35 Model-key fault Model-key recognition failed.
distributor.
● Contact your nearest local
37 Language key fault Language-key recognition failed.
distributor.
System operation ● Turn the power OFF and then
240 Unexpected error occurred.
error T back ON after 10 seconds.
The high-voltage power supply output
241 Memory Fault T ● Execute system setup.
voltage is too low or too high.
The level sensor in the ink reservoir does
● Contact your nearest local
243 Ink Low Fault 2 not work properly.
distributor.
IJ printer will stop the ink jet.
The level sensor in the makeup reservoir
Makeup Low ● Contact your nearest local
244 does not work properly.
Fault 2 distributor.
IJ printer will stop the ink jet.
Circulation Route ● Contact your nearest local
251 Circulation route pressure is high.
Pressure Is High distributor.

(2) Faults that do not invoke ink stoppage

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy
Print Data
The print data change procedure was
27 Changeover ● Check the data entered
incomplete.
Error C
Print Data
The print data change procedure was ● Change timing of print data
28 Changeover
incomplete. change.( 6.1)
Error T
● Ink stop and the printer power
Internal
OFF are recommend.
36 Communication The internal data processing error.
Turn the printer OFF and then
Error T
back ON after 10 seconds.
● Delete some print items or
Free Layout The free layout printing was aborted while
38 decrease the setting of the ink
Printing Failure the message was printing.
drop use. ( 4.8.6)
External ● Note the error code and see
The serial communication port had a data
40 Communication that no more error occure.
error.
Error nnn ( Technical manual 5.7)

9-7 ●On-screen message descriptions

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy
● Clean the gutter, deflection
electrode, and its
surroundings.
● Adjust the ink pressure.
( Technical manual 6.9)
Ink Drop Charge The charge sensor detects a high drop
42 ● Adjust the excitation V-ref. to
Too High charge.
make sure that the ink drops
are well made.
( Technical manual 6.10)
● Check that the ink stream is
correctly retracted.
●Configure the number of
Barcode Short On The number of characters for the selected ( 4.8.5) characters for
43
Numbers barcode type is insufficient. barcode to appropriate value.
( Technical manual 9)
●Turn the printer power OFF by
main switch.
44 Shutdown Fault The shutdown process failed.
Contact your nearest local
distributor.
The calculation result of the count ● Change the count multiplier
45 Count Overflow
multiplier overflowed. setting.
Invalid Data A print operation was requested while the ● Change of either data change
46
Change Timing print data was being changed. or print start.
Invalid Count Data A print operation was requested while the ● Change of either data change
47
Change Timing print data was being changed. or print start.
The print target detection signal for the next
Invalid Print Start ● Change of either data change
48 target arrived during the data was being
Timing or print start.
changed.
● Increase the spacing between
The print target detecter signal for the next products.
49 Print Overlap Fault target arrived during the print operation for ● If the target signal is
the current target. chattering, use sensor filter
setting. ( 4.15.1).
● Remove the cover and then
hit the Clear key.
Print Head Cover ● If a magnetic substance is
50 The print head cover is open.
Open used to fix the cover,
it must be replaced with
nonmagnetic resin (metal).
● Move the print target detecter
closer to the print head.
The print target detecter signal turned OFF
Detector Position ● If the target signal is
51 before print start during printing at repeat
Improper chattering, use sensor filter
print setting.
setting.
● Check the data entered.
● If the target is stopped in front
The print target detecter signal was ON of the sensor, move the target.
Target Sensor Time
52 longer than the timeout setting of Target ● Change the Target Sensor
Out
Sensor Timer. Timer setting.
( 4.15.1).

●On-screen message descriptions 9-8

 No. Message Meaning of message Remedy
There are 5 or more print target detector
Target Spacing Too ● Move the print target detecter
53 signal turned ON before print start during
Close closer to the print head.
printing at No repeat print setting.
● If the target signal is
Print Data chattering, Use Sensor filter
A print operation was requested while the
54 Changeover In setting.
print data was being changed.
Progress S ● Change of timing either print
data change or print start.
56 Blank Print Items The print items are not properly set up. ● Change the print data.
A column has more than 8 print format
● Perform setup so that the
Excessive Format types (the number of lines, line spacing,
57 number of print format types
Count character size, character spacing, bold
does not exceed 8.
charcter and bar code).
Print Data
A print operation was requested while the ● Change timing of either print
58 Changeover In
print data was being changed. data change or print start.
Progress M
● Adjust either the encoder
Print Data frequency or the pulse rate
A print operation was requested while the
59 Changeover In division factor.
video data was being changed.
Progress V ● Change timing of either print
data change or print start.
Communication The print contents are not in the .● Adjust the print and
60
Buffer Fault communication buffer. communication timing.
● Ink stop and the printer power
Internal
OFF are recommend.
62 Communication The internal data processing error.
Turn the printer OFF and then
Error C
back ON after 10 seconds.
● Ink stop and the printer power
Internal
OFF are recommend.
63 Communication The internal data processing error.
Turn the printer OFF and then
Error M
back ON after 10 seconds.
● Slow the print target speed.
Product Speed The encoder pulse rate exceeds the ● Decrease N in the ink drop
239
Matching Error available printing speed. use percentage (1/N).
( 4.15.1).
Ink Level Sensor The level sensor in the ink reservoir does ● Contact your nearest local
245
Broken 1 not work properly. distributor.
The level sensor in the makeup reservoir
does not work properly.
Makeup Level ● Contact your nearest local
246 The replacement of the Makeup Cartridge
Sensor Broken 1 distributor.
will be temporarily disabled until “Makeup
Low Waring” appears.
Ink Level Sensor The level sensor in the ink reservoir does ● Contact your nearest local
254
Broken 3 not work properly. distributor.
Makeup Level The level sensor in the makeup reservoir ● Contact your nearest local
255
Sensor Broken 3 does not work properly. distributor.

9-9 ●On-screen message descriptions

9.2.2 Warning messages
No. Message Meaning of message Remedy
● Perform the Nozzle test and
Excitation V-ref. The excitation voltage reference needs to update the Excitation V-ref.
65
Review be updated. setting.
( Technical manual 6.10)
The viscometer output readings fluctuated.
Viscosity Reading ● Contact your nearest local
66 Setting will be temporarily switched to no
Instable distributor.
use of viscometer.
Viscosity The viscometer is defective.
● Contact your nearest local
67 Readings Out of Setting will be temporarily switched to no
distributor.
Range use of viscometer.
● The ink concentration will be
adjusted to normal level.
68 Ink Viscosity High The ink viscosity is above the proper level. If print quality is still poor,
then replace ink.
( Technical manual 6.3)
● The ink concentration will be
adjusted to normal level.
69 Ink Viscosity Low Ink viscosity is below the proper level. If print quality is still poor,
then replace ink.
( Technical manual 6.3)
● Contact your nearest local
The internal battery in engine section is
distributor.
low.
71 Battery Low T ● Replace the internal battery
The latest print data and operating
in engine section and set the
information may not be saved.
data/time. ( 6.2).
● Contact your nearest local
Calendar Content Calendar content is inaccurate due to mal-
72 distributor.
Inaccurate function of the clock.
● Set the date/time.
External
The serial communication port had a data ● Note the error code and see
- Communication
error. that no more errors occur.
Error nnn
● Perform the Nozzle test and
update Excitation V-ref.
Excitation V-ref. setting.
Excitation setting and Character height
79 Char. Height ( Technical manual 6.10)
need to be reviewed.
Review ● Configure Character height
on Print specification screen.
( 4.15.1)
● Perform the Nozzle test and
update the Excitation V-ref.
setting.
Excitation V-ref. Up date the excitation voltage reference. ( Technical manual 6.10)
80
Review 2 Print quality may become poor. ● Watch for the print results and
the Excitation V-ref.
Setting. for about 2 hours
after operation is started.
● Replace the Ink Cartridge
81 Ink Low Warning The ink level in the ink reservoir is low. within 60 minutes
( 8.1).

●On-screen message descriptions 9-10

 No. Message Meaning of message Remedy
●Replace the Makeup Cartridge
Makeup Low The makeup level in the makeup reservoir
82 within 60 minutes.
Warning is low.
( 8.2).
Ink Shelf Life ● Replace the ink
83 Ink replacement time has come.
Expired ( Technical manual 6.3).
Ambient ● Ensure that the ambient
The ambient temperature is above the
84 Temperature Too temperature is within the
proper level.
High operating temperature limits.
Ambient ● Ensure that the ambient tem-
The ambient temperature is below the
85 Temperature Too perature is within the operat-
proper level.
Low ing temperature limits.
● Adjust the pressure-reducing
Ink pressure is higher than the
87 Ink Pressure High valve to correct the pressure.
recommended value.
( Technical manual 6.9)
● Contact your nearest local
distributor.
The internal battery in controller section is
88 Battery Low C ● Replace the internal battery
low.
in engine section and set the
data/time. ( 6.2).
● Adjust the pressure-reducing
Ink pressure is lower than the
93 Ink Pressure Low valve to correct the pressure.
recommended value..
( Technical manual 6.9)
● Contact your nearest local
129 Model-key Failure Model-key recognition failed.
distributor.
Language-key ● Contact your nearest local
130 Language-key recognition failed.
Failure distributor.
● Contact your nearest local
131 Upgrade-key Fault Upgrade-key recognition failed.
distributor.
Circulation System
The cooling fan of the circulation system ● Contact your nearest local
135 Cooling Fan
area is faulty. distributor.
Fault
● Prease confirm the ink
recovery status.
Inside Temperature The temperature inside the printer is ● Replace the air filter or make
136
Too High increasing. the space around printer.
● Contact your nearest local
distributor.
RFID Reader ● Contact your nearest local
151 RFID reader recognition failed.
Failure distributor.
Makeup Ejection ● Contact your nearest local
152 Makeup ejection pressure is getting low.
Pressure Low distributor.

9-11 ●On-screen message descriptions

 No. Message Meaning of message Remedy
The level sensor in the ink reservoir does
not work properly.
Ink Level ● Contact your nearest local
161 If IJ printer continues running as it is,
Sensor Broken 2 distributor.
IJ printer will regard it as "Ink low " and
stop the ink jet.
The level sensor in the makeup reservoir
does not work properly.
Makeup Level ● Contact your nearest local
162 If IJ printer continues running as it is,
Sensor Broken 2 distributor.
IJ printer will regard it as "Makeup low "
and stop the ink jet.
The level sensor in the ink reservoir does
not work properly.
● Contact your nearest local
163 Ink Low Warning 2 If IJ printer continues running as it is,
distributor.
IJ printer will stop the ink jet within 60
minutes.
The level sensor in the makeup reservoir
does not work properly.
Makeup Low ● Contact your nearest local
164 If IJ printer continues running as it is,
Warning 2 distributor.
IJ printer will stop the ink jet within 60
minutes.

9.2.3 Other messages

No. Message Meaning of message Remedy
Ink Temperature The selected setup does not allow ink ● Contact your nearest local
187
Correction Notice temperature corrections to be made. distributor.
No Ink
The current settings have made ink ● Contact your nearest local
200 Concentration
concentration control unavailable. distributor.
Control
Recent changes to print data and printer
Print Data/Settings ● Check print contents and each
201 settings may have been lost. In the previous
Notice setting value.
session, power was cut OFF suddenly.
● Turn the printer power OFF
and then back ON after 10
Print Start up
209 Printer startup failed. seconds.
Failure
● Contact your nearest local
distributor.
● Insert correctly.
USB Memory USB memory is not inserted. Or an error
210 ● Replace with a new USB
Error was generated when reading USB memory.
memory.

●On-screen message descriptions 9-12

 9.3 When checking the warning and fault generation status
(1) Functions
●The warning or fault message generation time and contents can be viewed.
●A maximum of 180 messages can be displayed.
●When 180 messages are exceeded, the messages are closed from the oldest message.

(2) Operation
Log in as administrator.

1 Press View alarm history in the Maintenance menu screen.

The Fault/warning screen is displayed.
Sorted from generation date.

Message No.
Fault/warning log [Stop ] Com=0
2018.07.07 12:45

Makeup Ink

Fault/warning log
No Date/time Name of alarm
Manual Startup
01
02
HOME
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

2 11
12
13
14
15
Back

9-13 ●When checking the warning and fault generation status

9.4 Remedial action to be taken in the event of a printing
failure
● If a printing failure occurs, perform the associated remedial procedures suggested below.
● If the remedial procedures below do not achieve recovery, it is conceivable that the problem is
attributable to a PC board or circulation system failure. In such an instance, contact your nearest local
distributor.
(*1) See the Technical Manual
Printing failure
No. description Probable cause Solution Reference
(phenomenon)
Chipped print ● Clean the gutter.
Ink and foreign matter are 6.6 (*1)
(minus deflection ● Replace the recovery
stuck to the gutter. 6.8 (*1)
electrode side) filter.
Ink and foreign matter are
● Clean the charge and
stuck to the charge and 3.1.2
deflection electrodes.
Direction of deflection deflection electrodes.
1 Ink and foreign matter are ● Remove the ink and foreign
-
stuck to the ink ejection port. matter.
←Chipped
(lost) The ink stream is improperly
● Adjust the ink stream. 6.5 (*1)
positioned.
● Adjust the ink pressure for
The ink pressure is too high. 6.9 (*1)
the standard value.
The ink has deteriorated. ● Replace the ink. 6.3 (*1)
1
Chipped print Ink and foreign matter are
● Clean the charge and
(plus deflection stuck to the charge and 3.1.2
deflection electrodes.
electrode side) deflection electrodes.
Ink and foreign matter are ● Remove the ink and foreign
-
stuck to the ink ejection port. matter.
Direction of deflection
←Chipped The flow within the nozzle is
2 (lost) ● Backwash the nozzle. 6.4 (*1)
restricted.
The character height setting is ● Decrease the character
4.15.1
too great. height setting.
● Adjust the ink pressure for
The ink pressure is too low. 6.9 (*1)
the standard value.
The ink has deteriorated. ● Replace the ink. 6.3 (*1)
The clearance between the ● Adjust the clearance
print head and print target has between the print head and -
changed. print target.
Ink and foreign matter
● Clean the charge and
are stuck to the charge and 3.1.2
deflection electrodes.
deflection electrodes.
Varying character Ink and foreign matter are ● Remove the ink and
3 -
height stuck to the ink ejection port. foreign matter.
The flow within the nozzle is
● Backwash the nozzle. 6.4 (*1)
restricted.
● Adjust the ink pressure for
The ink pressure has changed. 6.9 (*1)
the standard value.
The ink has deteriorated. ● Replace the ink. 6.3 (*1)

●Remedial action to be taken in the event of a printing failure 9-14

 Printing failure
No. description Probable cause Solution Reference
(phenomenon)
There are water, oil, or other
● Make prints with the print
deposits on the print target -
target clear of deposits.
surface.
● Adjust the ink pressure for
The ink pressure has changed. 6.9 (*1)
the standard value.
Ink and foreign matter are
Disordered ● Clean the charge and
4 stuck to the charge and 3.1.2
characters deflection electrodes.
deflection electrodes.
The flow within the nozzle is
● Backwash the nozzle. 6.4 (*1)
restricted.
The ink has deteriorated. ● Replace the ink. 6.3 (*1)
The excitation V-ref. value is
● Adjust the excitation V-ref.. 6.10 (*1)
improper.

9-15 ●Remedial action to be taken in the event of a printing failure

 10. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
If the printer does not start up normally, perform the following checks before deciding the printer is malfunctioning.
Phenomenon Check Solution
● Check that the main power switch is
● Turn ON the main power switch.
turned ON.
● Check that the power plug is properly ● Turn OFF the main power switch.
connected to a power outlet. Ensure that power is supplied to the
● Check that electrical power is supplied power outlet, and then connect the
The power does not turn to the employed power outlet. power plug to the power outlet.
ON at the press of the On ● Check that Status indicator lamp is not ● Ensure that Status indicator lamp is off
switch. on when On switch is pressed. when pressing the On switch.
● Check that On switch is pressed for ● Turn off the main power switch, wait
about 2 seconds. 10 seconds, and the turn back on.
Press the On switch.
● Ensure that Start switch is pressed for
about 2 seconds.
Pressing a key does not
invoke its predefined
operation. ● See "7.4 Touch Screen Coordinate correction".
Or the key is not accepted.
● Check that "clock stop" is not selected
The calendar time is not from the date/time setup screen. ● Select the "same as current time".
correctly printed. See "6.2 Set the Date and Time".
See "6.2 Set the Date and Time".
● Check for an ink stream ejection from ● Stop the ink ejection sequence by
the nozzle. pressing the Shut down .
The printer does not
● Check whether the ejected ink stream ● See the Technical Manual "6.4 How to
become ready for
enters the gutter hole. correct ink stream bending and nozzle
printing when Start up is
clogging", and correct the problem.
pressed.
● See "1.3 Print head cleaning", and
● Check if the print head are dirty.
perform the operation.
"Print overlap fault" occurs
frequently.
See "9. When Warning or Fault was generated".
A fault message is
displayed.
● Because of the characteristics of the
Residual image of liquid crystal panel, when the same
pattern is displayed for a long time,
characters, etc. remains on - a residual image of the pattern may
the screen.
remain. However, the residual image
will disappear with the passage of time.
● The tag may be broken. Manually
RFID cannot be read. - input the ID referring to "8. Refilling
ink and makeup".
The cartridge cannot be
changed without releasing - ● Push the lever into the equipment.
the lock.

CAUTION
● If the above remedies do not restore the printer to normal, stop using
the printer, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet, and
contact your Hitachi distributor.
■ Report the following to your local source or service company:
1. TYPE-FORM (model number) IJ printer (Model UX- )
2. SER. No. (serial number) UX
3. Failure description In detail
4. Organization name (department and section names included), name of person in charge, and
telephone number.
* The model number and serial number are marked on the nameplate that is attached to the right-hand side of the printer.
●Troubleshooting guide 10-1
 11. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Press the main power switch to turn OFF the power.

Main power switch

WARNING
● If an earthquake, fire, or other emergency arises while the printer is
operating or when its power is on, turn OFF the power by pressing the
main power switch.
Never perform this procedure except in case of an emergency.

● Immediately after the emergency is cleared, press the main power switch to turn the power back
ON and press the Start up to initiate ink ejection.

● If the emergency lasts for 5 minutes or longer, open the print head cover and clean the orifice plate
and its surrounding parts and gutter section by pouring makeup over them.
When resuming operation, thoroughly clean the orifice plate and its surrounding parts and gutter
section by pouring makeup over them, and then initiating ink ejection.

● If the power supply is shut off by a power failure, perform the same procedure as indicated above.

CAUTION
In the event of a power failure
When you use the printer after power restoration, be sure to confirm the printings
and other setup data beforehand. If you find any incorrect printings or setup data,
correct it.

11-1 ●Emergency Procedures

 12. SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Item
UX-D860
Nozzle diameter 65μm
Max. print line number Up to 8 lines
Maximum number of print
Up to 1,000 characters (Depends on print lines)
characters
4x5 V
5x5 V
5x7(8),9x7(8) V
7x10 V
11x11 V (Chinese only)
10x12 V
Font
12x16 V
18x24 V
24x32 V
30x40 V *1
36x48 V *1
48x64 V *1
2-21 mm / 0.08-0.83 inches
Character height
(Depends on print distance, print speed and operating temperature)
WYSIWYG design
Display & input device Display: TFT LCD (10.4" color), backlight provided
Input device: Touch panel, input sound provided
English, Chinese, Korean, Thai, Vietnamese, German, French, Dutch,
Screen language Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Greek, Russian, Czech,
(2 languages selectable) Polish, Arabic, Serbian, Trukish, Hungarian, Bulgarian, Cataian,
Romanian, Finnish, Norwegian, Siovenian
Up to 4,592
Maximum print rate
(character per second) (Font 5x5, space 1, 2 line)
Standard characters Alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), symbols (27), space : Total 90
User patterns 200 patterns each for dot matrix (50 patterns for 30x40, 36x48, 48x64 fonts)
Print functions Calendar, Count, Font mixture
code39, ITF, NW-7, EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A, UPC-E, code128/EAN-128,
Barcode printing
GS1 DataBar
Data Matrix (Alphabet 49 characters/Numerals:98 characters) ,
2D code printing
QR code, Micro QR code
Message storage capacity Up to 2,000 messages (Depends on data content)
Print target detection, Printing stop, Rotary encoder pulse, Reciprocative printing,
Input signal
Remote control (Run, Stop, High-voltage ON/OFF, Reset), (NPN/PNP Selectable)
Print in progress or Print complete, Online (NPN/PNP Selectable), Print ready,
Output signal
Fault, Warning (NPN Only)
External memory USB for user data storage
Head cable length / angle 4m (in-line / 90 degrees)
Operating temperature range 0-45ºC (1067K ink)
Operating humidity range 30-90% R.H. (No condensation)
Power supply
AC100-120/220-240V±10% 50/60Hz 150VA
(Automatic voltage selection)
Approval CE, UL, cUL, RCM, FCC, ICES
Dimensions
400x395x527mm
(Width x Depth x Height)
International protection IP55 (Printhead is excluded)
Approximate weight 34kg
*1 The character is printed with the switch charcter made by the user patterns for both nozzle 1 and 2.

●Specifications 12-1
 13. APPENDIX
INDEX
A
Actual print width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85, 4-86
Add column to end. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Adjust print parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 3-29, 4-2, 4-96, 5-7, 6-3
Alphabet month 3 digits (JAN, FEB, ----) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

B
Bold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25, 4-36, 6-4

C
Calendar block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43, 4-46, 4-48, 4-50, 4-52, 4-53, 4-55, 4-57, 4-61, 4-72, 4-75
Calendar offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Calendar time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43, 4-44, 4-49, 4-52, 6-1, 6-12, 6-13, 10-1
Calendar time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43, 6-12, 6-13
Change character orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8. 6-9, 6-10
Change group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-9, 7-11, 7-12, 7-14
Change group number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-14
Change message . . . . . . . 3-18, 3-19, 4-2, 4-5, 4-7, 4-16, 4-19, 4-22, 4-68, 4-81, 4-92, 7-2, 7-4, 7-6, 7-7
Change message name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-4
Change message number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-6, 7-7
Change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9
Change/create group name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-12
Character height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29, 4-2, 4-81, 4-91, 4-96, 9-14, 12-1
Character orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81, 4-82, 6-2, 6-3, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9, 6-10
Character width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 4-81, 4-82, 4-84, 4-85, 4-89, 4-90, 4-93, 4-96
Chimney . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25, 4-26, 4-28, 4-39, 4-89, 4-92
Circulation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 3-25, 5-1, 5-7
Clock display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Comm. Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-1
Communication environment setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-7, 6-1, 6-3
Copy data (IJP→USB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-7, 7-1, 7-31
Copy data (USB→IJP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-7, 7-1, 7-32, 7-33, 7-35
Count block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59, 4-63, 4-64, 4-71, 4-80, 6-3
Count multiplication printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74, 4-76
Count skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63, 4-77, 4-78, 4-79
Cover open state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Create user pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20, 5-7, 7-1, 7-16, 7-20, 7-24, 7-26, 7-27
Create/Edit message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 4-2, 4-16
Current message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27, 3-33, 4-2, 4-4, 4-5, 4-8, 4-13, 4-15, 4-18, 4-96

13-1 ●Appendix
 D
Data Entry Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Date/time setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33, 4-43, 5-7, 6-1, 6-3, 6-12, 10-1
Day of the week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Delete column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Delete group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11, 7-13
Delete stored message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-3, 7-5
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11, 4-15, 4-16, 7-2
Display All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11, 4-12, 4-15, 4-16, 7-2
Distance between print head and work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85, 4-86
Dot matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25, 4-36, 4-39, 4-40, 4-91, 7-16, 7-17, 7-30, 7-37, 12-1
Drop adjust state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Duplicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40, 4-55, 4-59, 7-21, 7-39

E
EAN Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30, 4-94
Edit message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 3-19, 4-2, 4-5, 4-6, 4-15, 4-16, 4-30, 4-40, 4-42
4-45, 4-50, 4-53, 4-56, 4-60, 4-70, 4-94, 4-98, 5-7
Edit standard pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-7, 6-3, 7-1, 7-37
Edit substitution rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-7, 7-1
Excitation V update (Nozzle test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 3-31, 5-1, 5-7, 6-3
Excitation V-ref. Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fault state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25, 9-1

Free layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-7, 4-9, 4-15, 4-31, 4-37, 4-81, 4-83, 4-89, 4-90, 4-92, 6-3, 6-4, 9-7
Free space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20, 4-7, 4-8, 4-9, 4-11, 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-17, 4-42, 4-43, 5-7
7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-6, 7-9,7-11, 7-12, 7-13, 7-14, 7-15

Handling the nozzle rubber seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

I
ICON Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13, 8-2, 8-8
Individual setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-7, 4-9, 4-15, 4-89, 4-90
Ink and makeup replenishment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 8-1
Ink drop charge rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83, 4-87, 4-88
Ink drop use percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81, 4-82, 4-83, 9-11
Ink heating state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 3-25, 9-5, 9-6, 9-7
Ink periodic replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Ink Temperature Correction Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24, 4-35, 4-40, 4-41
Insert column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Inter-character space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-25, 4-27, 4-28, 4-29, 4-36, 4-39, 4-40, 4-93, 5-7, 7-17
Interlaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83, 4-87, 4-88

●Appendix 13-2
 L
Line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-25, 4-39, 4-88, 9-9
Line speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84, 4-85, 4-93, 4-96
Login history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15, 6-17
Login management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 3-23, 6-1, 6-16, 6-17, 6-18
Login user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 3-12, 3-18, 3-21, 3-23, 4-2, 6-14, 6-15, 6-16, 6-18

M
Main power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 3-1, 3-3, 3-15, 10-1, 11-1
Manage group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-2, 7-11, 7-12, 7-13, 7-14
Manage messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-7, 7-1, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11, 9-13

N
No Ink Concentration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
No-cleaning stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4, 3-4, 3-5

O
OFF - ON transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49, 4-50, 4-51, 4-94, 7-1, 7-28
On switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 3-2, 3-13, 10-1
Operation management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 3-20, 4-1, 4-2, 5-1, 5-3, 5-4, 5-7, 6-3, 7-28
Overall setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-7, 4-9, 4-15, 4-38, 4-89, 4-90, 4-91, 4-92
Overwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 4-13, 4-14, 4-40, 4-41, 7-33
Overwrite message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27, 4-2, 4-13, 4-14, 4-18

P
Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-20, 5-1, 5-8, 6-15
Password setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 6-18
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41, 4-55, 4-59, 7-21, 7-26
Print characters one by one. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Print data changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96, 6-3, 9-7, 9-9
Print Data/Settings Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Print format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 3-19, 3-34, 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 4-9, 4-15, 4-21, 4-28, 4-31
4-38. 4-83, 4-88, 4-89, 4-90, 4-94, 5-7, 6-3, 7-30, 9-9
Print item . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23, 4-24, 4-25, 4-29, 4-31, 4-32, 4-33, 4-34, 4-35, 4-36, 4-37
4-38, 4-39, 4-41, 4-42, 4-46, 4-47, 4-57, 4-61, 4-64, 4-76, 4-92, 6-3, 6-4, 9-7, 9-9
Print layout. . . . . . . . . 3-27, 4-1, 4-2, 4-4, 4-35, 4-41, 4-42, 4-43, 4-47, 4-48, 4-51, 4-57, 4-61, 4-72, 4-99
Print signal type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Print specification . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 3-19, 4-6, 4-81, 4-84, 4-85, 4-86, 4-89, 4-91, 4-96, 5-7, 6-3, 7-30
Print start delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81, 4-84, 4-85, 4-86, 4-96
Print target width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85, 4-86
Printing method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-83, 4-92
Product speed matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84, 4-85, 4-86, 4-87, 4-88, 4-89, 4-93, 9-11
Pulse
3 rate division factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85, 9-9

13-3 ●Appendix
 R
Ready state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-25, 5-3, 5-5, 6-3, 6-4
Ready state → Standby state switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Repeat count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85, 4-93, 6-2
Repeat intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84, 4-85, 4-93
Repeat print sensor mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Reverse print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Right-angled printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 4-9, 4-15, 4-19, 4-38, 4-39, 4-40, 4-43, 4-52
4-54, 4-63, 4-80, 4-81, 4-82, 4-83, 4-84, 4-91, 6-3

S
Saved message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 4-4, 4-5, 4-8, 4-15, 7-1, 7-4, 7-5
Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7, 4-8, 4-9, 4-11, 4-12, 4-15, 4-16, 7-2
Select login user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 3-12, 3-18, 3-21, 3-23, 4-2, 6-14, 6-15, 6-16, 6-18
Select message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 4-2, 4-5, 4-10, 4-11, 4-15, 5-7
Selecting languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 7-40
Service state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Shift code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 4-43, 4-55, 4-56, 4-57, 4-58
Signal ON period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Single scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83, 4-87, 4-88
Solenoid valve / pump test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-1, 5-7
Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11, 4-12, 4-15, 4-16, 6-17, 7-2, 7-39, 9-13
Speed compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85, 4-86, 6-3
Speed compensation fine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85, 6-3
Standby state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-25, 5-5
Standby state → Ready state switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Starting state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Stop state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 3-25
Stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 3-1, 3-13, 3-15
Stopping state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Substitution rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 4-43, 4-44, 4-52, 4-53, 5-7, 6-12, 7-1, 7-33, 7-39

T
Target sensor filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85, 4-87
Target sensor timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87, 9-8
Test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-1, 5-5, 8-1
Time count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 4-43, 4-59, 4-60, 4-61, 4-62
To overall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Total number of days. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43, 4-44
Touch screen coordinate correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4, 7-28, 7-29, 10-1
Touch screen setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 3-23, 3-33, 3-34, 4-1, 5-7, 6-1, 6-14

U
Unit information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 5-1, 5-2
USB memory error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30, 9-12
User environment setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 3-33, 5-5, 5-7, 6-1, 6-3, 6-5

●Appendix 13-4
 V
Various print setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18, 3-19, 4-6, 4-94, 5-7, 6-2
View alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20, 5-1, 9-13
View software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20, 5-1, 5-6

W
Week No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43, 4-44

Z
Zero-suppression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44, 4-52, 4-63, 4-69, 4-74, 4-76

13-5 ●Appendix
2S23M1348-4H